ENGINEERING TOMORROW

Programming Guide
VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

vlt-drives.danfoss.com
Contents Programming Guide

Contents

1 Introduction 3
1.1 How to Read This Programming Guide 3
1.2 Definitions 4
1.3 Electrical Wiring - Control Cables 7

2 Safety 11
2.1 Safety Symbols 11
2.2 Qualified Personnel 11
2.3 Safety Precautions 11

3 Programming 13
3.1 Local Control Panel Operations 13
3.2 Basic Programming 21

4 Parameter Descriptions 24
4.1 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 24
4.2 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 33
4.3 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 45
4.4 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 47
4.5 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 53
4.6 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out 57
4.7 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 69
4.8 Parameters: 7-** Controllers 72
4.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options 77
4.10 Parameters: 9-** PROFIdrive 81
4.11 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet 87
4.12 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control 90
4.13 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions 96
4.14 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 103
4.15 Parameters: 16-** Data Readouts 105
4.16 Parameters: 17-** Feedback Options 108
4.17 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2 109
4.18 Parameters: 21-** Ext. Closed Loop 110
4.19 Parameters: 22-** Application Functions 111
4.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 112
4.21 Parameters: 32-** Motion Control Basic Settings 113
4.22 Parameters: 33-** Motion Control Adv. Settings 113
4.23 Parameters: 34-** Motion Control Data Readouts 114
4.24 Parameters: 37-** Application Settings 115

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 1

Contents VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5 Parameter Lists 121

5.1 Introduction 121
5.2 Parameter Lists 124

6 Troubleshooting 143
6.1 Warnings and Alarms 143

Index 152

2 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Introduction Programming Guide

1 Introduction 1 1

1.1 How to Read This Programming Guide °C Degrees Celsius

°F Fahrenheit
1.1.1 Purpose of the Manual AC Alternating current
AEO Automatic energy optimization
This programming guide provides information about ACP Application control processor
controlling the frequency converter, parameter access, AWG American wire gauge
programming, and troubleshooting. AMA Automatic motor adaptation
The programming guide is intended for use by qualified DC Direct current
personnel who are familiar with VLT® AutomationDrive FC Electrically erasable programmable
360. EEPROM
read-only memory
Read the instructions before programming and follow the EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
procedures in this manual.
EMI Electromagnetic interference
VLT® is a registered trademark.
ESD Electrostatic discharge
ETR Electronic thermal relay
1.1.2 Additional Resources fM,N Nominal motor frequency
FC Frequency converter
Additional resources include: IGBT Insulated-gate bipolar transistor
IP Ingress protection
• VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360 Quick Guide provides ILIM Current limit
the necessary information for getting the IINV Rated inverter output current
frequency converter up and running. IM,N Nominal motor current
• VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360 Design Guide IVLT,MAX Maximum output current
provides detailed technical information about the Rated output current supplied by the
IVLT,N
frequency converter and customer design and frequency converter
applications. Ld Motor d-axis inductance
Lq Motor q-axis inductance
Contact the local Danfoss supplier or go to
www.danfoss.com/fc360 to download the documentation. LCP Local control panel
LED Light-emitting diode
MCP Motor control processor
1.1.3 Document and Software Version
N.A. Not applicable
National Electrical Manufacturers
This manual is regularly reviewed and updated. All NEMA
Association
suggestions for improvement are welcome. Table 1.1 shows
PM,N Nominal motor power
the document version and the corresponding software
version. PCB Printed circuit board
PE Protective earth
PELV Protective extra low voltage
Software
Edition Remarks PWM Pulse width modulation
version
Update due to new hardware and Rs Stator resistance
MG06C8 1.8x Regen Regenerative terminals
software release.
RPM Revolutions per minute
Table 1.1 Document and Software Version RFI Radio frequency interference
SCR Silicon controlled rectifier
SMPS Switch mode power supply
TLIM Torque limit
UM,N Nominal motor voltage
Xh Motor main reactance

Table 1.2 Abbreviations

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 3

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1 1 1.1.4 Approvals and Certifications IM,N

Nominal motor current (nameplate data).
nM,N
Nominal motor speed (nameplate data).
ns
Synchronous motor speed.
2 × Parameter 1−23 × 60 s
1.2 Definitions ns =
Parameter 1−39
nslip
1.2.1 Frequency Converter Motor slip.

Coast PM,N
The motor shaft is in free mode. No torque on the motor. Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp).

IVLT,MAX TM,N
Maximum output current. Rated torque (motor).

IVLT,N UM
Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter. Instantaneous motor voltage.

UVLT,MAX UM,N
Maximum output voltage. Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
Break-away torque
1.2.2 Input Torque

175ZA078.10
Pull-out
Control commands
Start and stop the connected motor with the LCP and
digital inputs.
Functions are divided into 2 groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.
Group 1 Coast stop, reset and coast stop, quick stop, DC
braking, stop, and [OFF].
Group 2 Start, latched start, start reversing, jog, freeze
output, and [Hand On].

RPM
Table 1.3 Function Groups
Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque
1.2.3 Motor

Motor running ηVLT

Torque generated on the output shaft and speed from The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the
0 RPM to maximum speed on the motor. ratio between the power output and the power input.

fJOG Start-disable command

Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via A start-disable command belonging to the control
digital terminals or bus). commands in group 1. See Table 1.3 for more details.

fM Stop command
Motor frequency. A stop command belonging to the control commands in
group 1. See Table 1.3 for more details.
fMAX
Maximum motor frequency.
1.2.4 References
fMIN
Minimum motor frequency. Analog reference
fM,N A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54 can be
Rated motor frequency (nameplate data). voltage or current.
IM Binary reference
Motor current (actual). A signal transmitted via the serial communication port.

4 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Introduction Programming Guide

Preset reference FC standard bus 1 1

A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100% Includes RS485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via parameter 8-30 Protocol.
the digital terminals. Selection of 4 preset references via Initializing
the bus. If initializing is carried out (parameter 14-22 Operation Mode
Pulse reference or 2-finger reset), the frequency converter returns to the
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs default setting.
(terminal 29 or 33). Intermittent duty cycle
RefMAX An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
Determines the relationship between the reference input at cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-
resulting reference. The maximum reference value is set in periodic duty.
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. LCP
RefMIN The local control panel makes up a complete interface for
Determines the relationship between the reference input at control and programming of the frequency converter. The
0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting LCP is detachable. With the installation kit option, the LCP
reference. The minimum reference value is set in can be installed up to 3 m (9.8 ft) from the frequency
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. converter in a front panel.
GLCP
1.2.5 Miscellaneous The graphic local control panel (LCP 102) interface for
control and programming of the frequency converter. The
Analog inputs display is graphic and the panel is used to show process
The analog inputs are used for controlling various values. The GLCP has storing and copy functions.
functions of the frequency converter.
NLCP
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
The numerical local control panel (LCP 21) interface for
• Current input: 0–20 mA and 4–20 mA. control and programming of the frequency converter. The
display is numerical and the panel is used to show process
• Voltage input: 0–10 V DC.
values. The NLCP has storing and copy functions.
Analog outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0–20 mA, or 4– lsb
20 mA. Least significant bit.

Automatic motor adaptation, AMA msb

The AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters Most significant bit.
for the connected motor at standstill. MCM
Brake resistor Short for mille circular mil, an American measuring unit for
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067 mm2.
brake power generated in regenerative braking. This On-line/off-line parameters
regenerative brake power increases the DC-link voltage Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately
and a brake chopper ensures that the power is transmitted after the data value is changed. To activate changes to off-
to the brake resistor. line parameters, press [OK].
CT characteristics Process PID
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications The PID control maintains speed, pressure, and
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps, and cranes. temperature by adjusting the output frequency to match
Digital inputs the varying load.
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various PCD
functions of the frequency converter. Process control data.
Digital outputs Power cycle
The frequency converter features 2 solid-state outputs that Switch off the mains until the display (LCP) is dark, then
can supply a 24 V DC (maximum 40 mA) signal. turn power on again.
ETR Power factor
Electronic thermal relay is a thermal load calculation based The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate the
3 x U x I1 cosϕ1
motor temperature. Power  factor  =  
3 x U x IRMS

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 5

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1 1 For VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360 frequency converters, STW

cosϕ1 = 1, therefore: Status word.

I1 x cosϕ1 I1 THD
Power  factor  =    =    Total harmonic distortion states the total contribution of
IRMS IRMS
The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency harmonic distortion.
converter imposes a load on the mains supply. Thermistor
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
same kW performance. temperature is monitored (frequency converter or motor).

 IRMS   =   I21  +  I25  + I27  +  ..  +  I2n Trip

In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different A state entered in fault situations, for example if the
harmonic currents are low. frequency converter is subject to overvoltage or when it is
The built-in DC coils produce a high power factor, protecting the motor, process, or mechanism. Restart is
minimizing the imposed load on the mains supply. prevented until the cause of the fault has disappeared, and
the trip state is canceled by activating reset or, sometimes,
Pulse input/incremental encoder by being programmed to reset automatically. Do not use
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back trip for personal safety.
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in
applications where great accuracy in speed control is Trip lock
required. Trip lock is a state entered in fault situations when the
frequency converter is protecting itself and requiring
RCD physical intervention., An example causing a trip lock is the
Residual current device. frequency converter being subject to a short circuit on the
Set-up output. A locked trip can only be canceled by cutting off
Save parameter settings in 2 set-ups. Change between the mains, removing the cause of the fault, and reconnecting
2 parameter set-ups and edit 1 set-up while another set-up the frequency converter. Restart is prevented until the trip
is active. state is canceled by activating reset or, sometimes, by
being programmed to reset automatically. Do not use trip
SFAVM
lock for personal safety.
Acronym describing the switching pattern stator flux-
oriented asynchronous vector modulation. VT characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
Slip compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip by VVC+
giving the frequency a supplement that follows the If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
measured motor load, keeping the motor speed almost voltage vector control (VVC+) improves the dynamics and
constant. stability, both when the speed reference is changed and in
Smart logic control (SLC) relation to the load torque.
The SLC is a sequence of user-defined actions executed 60° AVM
when the smart logic controller evaluates the associated Refers to the switching pattern 60° asynchronous vector
user-defined events as true (parameter group 13-** Smart modulation.
Logic Control).

6 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Introduction Programming Guide

1.3 Electrical Wiring - Control Cables 1 1

1.3.1 Overview

130BC438.19
3)
RFI
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power 93 (L3) (W) 98
input (PE) 99
95 PE
Motor
Switch mode
power supply 1) (-UDC) 88
10 V DC 24 V DC (+UDC) 89 Brake
15 mA 100 mA
resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + -
+10 V DC (BR) 81 5)

0-10 V DC 53 (A IN)
0/4-20 mA

0-10 V DC 54 (A IN)
0/4-20 mA
Relay 1
55 (COM A IN/OUT) 03
250 V AC, 3 A
02
Analog 42 (A OUT)
output
01
0/4-20 mA
45 (A OUT)

12 (+24 V OUT)
Relay 2 2)

P 5-00 06
250 V AC, 3 A
24 V (NPN) 05
18 (D IN) 0 V (PNP)
24 V (NPN) 04
19 (D IN) 0 V (PNP)

20 (COM D IN)
4)
24 V (NPN) ON=Terminated
1 2

ON

27 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP) OFF=Open

24 V
5V
0V
24 V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0 V (PNP)
24 V S801 0V

RS485
(N RS485) 69 RS485
0V Interface

24 V (NPN) (P RS485) 68
31 (D IN) 0 V (PNP)
0V (COM RS485) 61
24 V (NPN)
32 (D IN) 0 V (PNP) (PNP) = Source
24 V (NPN) (NPN) = Sink
33 (D IN) 0 V (PNP)

Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing

A = Analog, D = Digital
1) Built-in brake chopper available from J1–J5.
2) Relay 2 is 2-pole for J1–J3 and 3-pole for J4–J7. Relay 2 of J4–J7 with terminals 4, 5, and 6 has same NO/NC logic as relay 1.
Relays are pluggable in J1–J5 and fixed in J6–J7.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 7

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1 1 3) Single DC choke in J1–J5; Dual DC choke in J6–J7.

4) Switch S801 (bus terminal) can be used to enable termination on the RS485 port (terminals 68 and 69).
5) No BR for J6–J7.

In rare cases, long control cables and analog signals could

130BD368.11
+24 VDC

0 VDC
result in 50/60 Hz ground loops due to noise from mains NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
supply cables. If this occurs, break the shield or insert a
100 nF capacitor between shield and chassis. 12 18 19 27 29 31 32 33 55

The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be

connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20
and 55) of the frequency converter to avoid ground
currents from both groups to affect other groups. For
example, switching on the digital input could disturb the
analog input signal.

Input polarity of control terminals

PNP (Source)
130BD367.11
+24 VDC

Digital input wiring

0 VDC

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 55
Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)

NOTICE
Control cables must be shielded/armored.

See the section Using Shielded Control Cables in the design

guide for the correct termination of control cables.

130BA681.10
Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)

Illustration 1.5 Grounding of Shielded/Armored Control Cables

8 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Introduction Programming Guide

1.3.2 Start/Stop 1.3.3 Latched Start/Stop Inverse 1 1

Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
Start. Latched start.
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [6]
No operation (Default coast inverse). Stop inverse.

130BD369.11

130BD370.11
P 5-10 [8]
P 5-12 [0]

P 5 - 10 [9]

P 5 - 12 [6]
+24V

+24 V
12 18 19 27 29 31 32 33 20
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33

Start/Stop

Speed

Latched start Stop inverse

Speed
Start
[18]

Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop

Latched start (18)

Stop inverse (27)

Illustration 1.7 Latched Start/Stop Inverse

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 9

 Introduction VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1 1 1.3.4 Speed Up/Down 1.3.5 Potentiometer Reference

Terminals 29/32=Speed up/down Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Terminal 18 = Parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Reference source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default).
Input [8] Start (default). Terminal 53, low voltage = 0 V.
Terminal 27 = Parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Terminal 53, high voltage = 10 V.
Input [19] Freeze reference.
Terminal 53, low ref./feedback = 0.
Terminal 29 = Parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
Input [21] Speed up. Terminal 53, high ref./feedback = 50.

Terminal 32 = Parameter 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Parameter 6-19 Terminal 53 mode = [1] Voltage.
Input [22] Speed down.

+10 V/30 mA

130BF873.10
130BF821.10

FC
+24 V 12
Speed
D IN 18 P 6-15 50 53 54 55
D IN 19
D IN 27
D IN 29
D IN 31
D IN 32
Ref. voltage
D IN 33 P 6-11 10V

1 kΩ
+10 V 50
A IN 53
A IN 54 Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference
COM 55
A OUT 42

Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down

10 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Safety Programming Guide

2 Safety
2 2
2.1 Safety Symbols WARNING
The following symbols are used in this guide: UNINTENDED START
When the frequency converter is connected to AC mains,
DC supply, or load sharing, the motor may start at any
WARNING time. Unintended start during programming, service, or
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could repair work can result in death, serious injury, or
result in death or serious injury. property damage. The motor can start via an external
switch, a serial bus command, an input reference signal

CAUTION from the LCP, or after a cleared fault condition.

To prevent unintended motor start:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could
result in minor or moderate injury. It can also be used to • Disconnect the frequency converter from the
mains.
alert against unsafe practices.
• Press [Off/Reset] on the LCP before
programming parameters.
NOTICE
Indicates important information, including situations that • Completely wire and assemble the frequency
can result in damage to equipment or property. converter, motor, and any driven equipment
before connecting the frequency converter to
AC mains, DC supply, or load sharing.
2.2 Qualified Personnel
Correct and reliable transport, storage, installation,
operation, and maintenance are required for the trouble- WARNING
free and safe operation of the drive. Only qualified DISCHARGE TIME
personnel are allowed to install and operate this The frequency converter contains DC-link capacitors,
equipment. which can remain charged even when the frequency
converter is not powered. High voltage can be present
Qualified personnel are defined as trained staff, who are even when the warning LED indicator lights are off.
authorized to install, commission, and maintain equipment, Failure to wait the specified time after power has been
systems, and circuits in accordance with pertinent laws and removed before performing service or repair work can
regulations. Also, the qualified personnel must be familiar result in death or serious injury.
with the instructions and safety measures described in this
manual.
• Stop the motor.
• Disconnect AC mains and remote DC-link power
2.3 Safety Precautions supplies, including battery back-ups, UPS, and
DC-link connections to other frequency
WARNING converters.
HIGH VOLTAGE • Disconnect or lock PM motor.
Drives contain high voltage when connected to AC mains
• Wait for the capacitors to discharge fully. The
input, DC supply, or load sharing. Failure to perform minimum waiting time is specified in Table 2.1
installation, start-up, and maintenance by qualified and is also visible on the product label on top
personnel can result in death or serious injury. of the frequency converter.
• Only qualified personnel must perform instal-
• Before performing any service or repair work,
lation, start-up, and maintenance. use an appropriate voltage measuring device to
• Before performing any service or repair work, make sure that the capacitors are fully
use an appropriate voltage measuring device to discharged.
make sure that there is no remaining voltage on
the drive.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 11

 Safety VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Minimum waiting
Voltage Power range
time
[V] [kW (hp)]

2 2
(minutes)
0.37–7.5 kW
380–480 4
(0.5–10 hp)
11–75 kW
380–480 15
(15–100 hp)

Table 2.1 Discharge Time

WARNING
LEAKAGE CURRENT HAZARD
Leakage currents exceed 3.5 mA. Failure to ground the
drive properly can result in death or serious injury.
• Ensure the correct grounding of the equipment
by a certified electrical installer.

WARNING
EQUIPMENT HAZARD
Contact with rotating shafts and electrical equipment
can result in death or serious injury.
• Ensure that only trained and qualified personnel
perform installation, start-up, and maintenance.
• Ensure that electrical work conforms to national
and local electrical codes.
• Follow the procedures in this guide.

CAUTION
INTERNAL FAILURE HAZARD
An internal failure in the drive can result in serious injury
when the drive is not properly closed.
• Ensure that all safety covers are in place and
securely fastened before applying power.

NOTICE
HIGH ALTITUDES
For installation at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft),
contact Danfoss regarding PELV.

NOTICE
USE ON ISOLATED MAINS
For details about the use of the frequency converter on
isolated mains, refer to the section RFI Switch in the
design guide.
Follow the recommendations regarding the installation
on IT mains. Use relevant monitoring devices for IT
mains to avoid damage.

12 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Programming Programming Guide

3 Programming

3.1 Local Control Panel Operations A. Numeric display

The LCD display is backlit with 1 numeric line. All data is
VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360 supports numerical local
control panel (NLCP) LCP 21, graphic local control panel
shown in the LCP. 3 3
(GLCP) LCP 102, and blind cover. This chapter describes the 1 The set-up number shows the active set-up and the edit
operations with LCP 21 and LCP 102. set-up. If the same set-up acts as both active and edit set-
up, only that set-up number is shown (factory setting).
When active and edit set-ups differ, both numbers are
NOTICE shown in the display (set-up 12). The number flashing
The frequency converter can also be programmed from indicates the edit set-up.
the MCT-10 Set-up Software on PC via RS485 com-port. 2 Parameter number.
This software can be ordered using code number 3 Parameter value.
130B1000 or downloaded from the Danfoss website:
4 Motor direction is shown at the bottom left of the display.
drives.danfoss.com/downloads/pctools/#/.
A small arrow indicates the direction.
5 The triangle indicates whether the LCP is in Status, Quick
3.1.1 Numerical Local Control Panel Menu, or Main Menu.

The numerical local control panel LCP 21 is divided into 4 Table 3.1 Legend to Illustration 3.1, Section A
functional sections.

130BD135.10
Setup 1234 AHP
A. Numeric display. VkW
srpm
B. Menu key. p5 p4
n1 n2 n3
Hz%
INDEX p3 p2 p1

C. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). Illustration 3.2 Display Information
D. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
130BC506.10

1 B. Menu key
To select between Status, Quick Menu, or Main Menu,
press [Menu].
3
A
C. Indicator lights (LEDs) and navigation keys
Setup 1
5 Indicator Light Function
2 ON turns on when the frequency
Status Quick Main converter receives power from the
4 B 10
6 On Green
Menu Menu mains voltage, a DC bus terminal, or a
Menu 24 V external supply.
9 When warning conditions are met, the
C 11 yellow WARN LED turns on, and text
7 Warn Yellow
Back

appears in the display area identifying

On OK
6 the problem.
12
Warn
A fault condition causes the red alarm
8 Alarm Red LED to flash and an alarm text is
7
Alarm shown.
8 10
D Hand Off Auto Table 3.2 Legend to Illustration 3.1, Indicator Lights (LEDs)
On Reset On

13 14 15

Illustration 3.1 View of the LCP 21

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 13

 Programming VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

130BC440.10
Key Function
Setup 1
For moving to the previous step or layer
9 [Back]
in the navigation structure.
For switching between parameter groups,
parameters, and within parameters, or
3 3 10 [▲] [▼] increasing/decreasing parameter values. Setup 1

Arrows can also be used for setting local

reference.
Press to access parameter groups or to
11 [OK]
enable a selection.
Press to move from left to right within Setup 1

12 [►] the parameter value to change each digit

individually.

Table 3.3 Legend to Illustration 3.1, Navigation Keys

Setup 1

D. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs)

Key Function
Starts the frequency converter in local control.
Setup 1
• An external stop signal by control input or
13 Hand On serial communication overrides the local
hand on.
Illustration 3.3 Right-key Function
Stops the motor but does not remove power
to the frequency converter, or resets the
14 Off/Reset frequency converter manually after a fault has
been cleared. If in alarm mode, the alarm is
[►] can also be used for moving between parameter
reset if the alarm condition is removed.
groups. When in Main Menu, press [►] to move to the first
parameter in the next parameter group (for example, move
Puts the system in remote operational mode.
from parameter 0-03 Regional Settings [0] International to
15 Auto On • Responds to an external start command by
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Open loop).
control terminals or bus communication.

Table 3.4 Legend to Illustration 3.1, Section D 3.1.3 Quick Menu on NLCP

WARNING The Quick Menu gives easy access to the most frequently
used parameters.
HIGH VOLTAGE
Touching the frequency converter after pressing the [Off/ 1. To enter Quick Menu, press [Menu] until the
Reset] key is still dangerous, because the key does not indicator in the display is placed above Quick
disconnect the frequency converter from the mains. Menu.
2. Press [▲] [▼] to select either QM1 or QM2, then
• Disconnect the frequency converter from the
press [OK].
mains and wait for the frequency converter to
fully discharge. See the discharge time in 3. Press [▲] [▼] to browse through the parameters in
Table 2.1. Quick Menu.
4. Press [OK] to select a parameter.
3.1.2 The Right-key Function on NLCP 5. Press [▲] [▼] to change the value of a parameter
setting.
Press [►] to edit any of the 4 digits on the display
individually. When pressing [►] once, the cursor moves to 6. Press [OK] to accept the change.
the first digit and the digit starts flashing as shown in 7. To exit, press either [Back] twice (or 3 times if in
Illustration 3.3. Press the [▲] [▼] to change the value. QM2 and QM3) to enter Status, or press [Menu]
Pressing [►] does not change the value of the digits or once to enter Main Menu.
move the decimal point.

14 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

MG06C802
Programming

QM 1 QM 2 Changes made QM 3 QM 4 QM 5
130BC445.13

Alarm log TBD

Language 0-01 [0] Basic motor set-up Adv. motor set-up Encoder set-up

BMS ES L10C SFS

Motor Type 1-10 [0] AMS
Last 10 changes Since factory setting
PM motor Asynchronous motor
Stator Terminal 32/33
Motor current 1-00 [0] 1-30 XXXX Resistance (Rs) 5-70 XXXX
1-24 XXXX A 1-20 XXXX kW Motor power mode pulses per revolution

Motor
Motor control 1-39 XXXX Motor poles Terminal 32/33
nominal 1-25 XXXX RPM 1-22 XXXX V Motor voltage 1-01 [1] 5-71 [0]
principle encoder direction
speed
Motor cont. Motor thermal
rated torque
1-26 XXXX 1-23 XXXX Hz Motor frequency 1-90 [0] protection
Motor type 1-10 [0]
Stator PM motor Asynchronous motor
Resistance (Rs) 1-30 XXXX 1-24 XXXX A Motor current 2-10 [0] Brake function

Motor
Motor poles 1-39 XXXX Motor 1-24 XXXX A 1-20 XXXX kW Motor power
1-25 XXXX RPM nominal current 4-16 XXXX % Torque limit motor mode
speed
Motor
Back EMF at 1-40 XXXX 1-25 XXXX RPM
nominal 1-22 XXXX V Motor voltage
1000 RPM
Programming Guide

speed 4-17 XXXX % Torque limit generator mode

d-axis 1-37 XXXX Motor cont.

inductance (Ld) rated torque
1-26 XXXX 1-23 XXXX Hz Motor frequency
4-18 XXXX % Current limit

Stator
Resistance (Rs) 1-30 XXXX 1-24 XXXX A Motor current
3-02 XXXX Hz Minimum reference

Motor poles 1-39 XXXX Motor

Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved.

3-03 XXXX Hz Maximum reference 1-25 XXXX RPM nominal
speed
Back EMF at
1000 RPM 1-40 XXXX
3-41 XXXX S Ramp 1 ramp-up time

d-axis 1-37 XXXX

inductance (Ld)
3-42 XXXX S Ramp 1 ramp-down time

5-12 [2] Terminal 27 digital input

4-19 XXXX Hz Maximum output frequency
1-29 [1] AMA

4-14 XXXX Hz Motor speed high limit [Hz]

Illustration 3.4 Quick Menu Structure

15
3 3
 Programming VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

3.1.4 Status Menu on NLCP 3.1.5 Main Menu on NLCP

After power-up, Status Menu is active. Press [Menu] to The Main Menu gives access to all parameters.
toggle between Status, Quick Menu, and Main Menu.
1. To enter Main Menu, press [Menu] until the

3 3 [▲] and [▼] toggle between the options in each menu. indicator in the display is placed above Main
Menu.
The display indicates the status mode with a small arrow 2. [▲] [▼]: Browse through the parameter groups.
above Status.
3. Press [OK] to select a parameter group.
4. [▲] [▼]: Browse through the parameters in the

130BA466.10
specific group.
5. Press [OK] to select the parameter.
6. [►] and [▲] [▼]: Set/change the parameter value.
7. Press [OK] to accept the value.
8. To exit, press either [Back] twice (or 3 times for
array parameters) to enter Main Menu, or press
[Menu] once to enter Status.
See Illustration 3.6, Illustration 3.7, and Illustration 3.8 for the
Illustration 3.5 Indicating Status Mode principles of changing the value of continuous,
enumerated, and array parameters, respectively. The
actions in the illustrations are described in Table 3.5,
The following 8 parameters can be accessed from the NLCP Table 3.6, and Table 3.7.
status menu in auto-on mode:
• Parameter 16-02 Reference [%].
• Parameter 16-09 Custom Readout.
• Parameter 16-10 Power [kW].
• Parameter 16-13 Frequency.
• Parameter 16-14 Motor current.
• Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].
• Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage.
• Parameter 16-52 Feedback[Unit].
The following 6 parameters can be accessed from the NLCP
status menu in [Hand On] mode:
• Parameter 16-09 Custom Readout.
• Parameter 16-10 Power [kW].
• Parameter 16-13 Frequency.
• Parameter 16-14 Motor current.
• Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].
• Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage.

16 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Programming Programming Guide

1 [OK]: The first parameter in the group is shown.

130BC446.10
Setup 1
12 2 Press [▼] repeatedly to move down to the parameter.
3 Press [OK] to start editing.
OK 1 4 [►]: First digit flashing (can be edited).

Back
11
5 [►]: Second digit flashing (can be edited).

3 3
Setup 1
6 [►]: Third digit flashing (can be edited).
2x 10
7 [▼]: Decreases the parameter value, the decimal point
2 changes automatically.
+ OK Setup 1 8 [▲]: Increases the parameter value.
9 [Back]: Cancel changes, return to 2.
[OK]: Accept changes, return to 2.
OK 3
10 [▲][▼]: Select parameter within the group.
Setup 1
11 [Back]: Removes the value and shows the parameter group.
12 [▲][▼]: Select group.
4
Table 3.5 Changing Values in Continuous Parameters
Setup 1

For enumerated parameters, the interaction is similar, but

the parameter value is shown in brackets because of the
5
LCP 21 digits limitation (4 large digits), and the enum can
Setup 1 be greater than 99. When the enum value is greater than
99, the LCP 21 can only show the first part of the bracket.
9
6

130BC447.11
OK
Setup 1 Setup 1 7
Back

7 OK 1

Back
6
Setup 1
Setup 1
5

8 OK 2
Setup 1 Back
4 OK
Setup 1

Illustration 3.6 Main Menu Interactions - Continuous

Parameters Illustration 3.7 Main Menu Interactions - Enumerated
Parameters

1 [OK]: The first parameter in the group is shown.

2 Press [OK] to start editing.
3 [▲][▼]: Change parameter value (flashing).
4 Press [Back] to cancel changes or [OK] to accept changes
(return to screen 2).
5 [▲][▼]: Select a parameter within the group.
6 [Back]: Removes the value and shows the parameter group.
7 [▲][▼]: Select a group.

Table 3.6 Changing Values in Enumerated Parameters

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 17

 Programming VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Array parameters function as follows: 3.1.6 Graphical Local Control Panel

130BC448.10
Setup 1 10 The graphical local control panel LCP 102 has a larger
display area, which shows more information than LCP 21.
5x
LCP 102 supports English, Chinese, and Portuguese
1 9

3 3
OK displays.

Back
Setup 1
%
8 The GLCP is divided into 4 functional groups (see
INDEX Illustration 3.9).
OK 2

Setup 1 A. Display area.

Back
INDEX
% 7 B. Display menu keys.
C. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Setup 1 OK D. Operation keys and reset.
% 6

130BD598.10
INDEX
Back

OK 4 1 3
Status 1(1)
799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kW
Setup 1

% 5
2
A
0.000
INDEX 5
53.2 %

4 Auto Remote Ramping

Illustration 3.8 Main Menu Interactions - Array Parameters

6 9
Quick Main Alarm
B Status Menu Menu Log
1 [OK]: Shows parameter numbers and the value in the first
index.
2 [OK]: Index can be selected. 7
8
3 [▲][▼]: Select index. Ca
ck

nc
Ba

el 11
4 [OK]: Value can be edited.
10 C
5 [▲][▼]: Change parameter value (flashing).
12
On
Info

6 [Back]: Cancels changes. OK

[OK]: Accepts changes. 15

Warn.
7 [Back]: Cancels editing index, a new parameter can be 16 13
Alarm
selected.
17
8 [▲][▼]: Select parameter within the group.
D Hand Auto Reset
9 [Back]: Removes parameter index value and shows the Off
On On
14
parameter group.
10 [▲][▼]: Select group. 18 19 20 21

Illustration 3.9 Graphic Local Control Panel (GLCP)

Table 3.7 Changing Values in Array Parameters

A. Display area
The display area is activated when the frequency converter
receives power from the mains voltage or a DC bus
terminal.
The information shown on the LCP can be customized for
user applications. Select options in the Quick Menu Q3-13
Display Settings.

18 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Programming Programming Guide

Display Parameter number Default setting Indicator Light Function

1 0-20 [1602] Reference [%] ON turns on when the frequency
2 0-21 [1614] Motor Current converter receives power from the
15 On Green
3 0-22 [1610] Power [kW] mains voltage or a DC bus
4 0-23 [1613] Frequency terminal.

3 3
5 0-24 [1502] kWh Counter When warning conditions are met,
the yellow WARN LED turns on,
16 Warn Yellow
Table 3.8 Legend to Illustration 3.9, Display Area and text appears in the display
area identifying the problem.
B. Display menu keys A fault condition causes the red
Menu keys are used for menu access for parameter set-up, 17 Alarm Red alarm LED to flash, and an alarm
toggling through status display modes during normal text is shown.
operation, and viewing fault log data.
Table 3.11 Legend to Illustration 3.9, Indicator Lights (LEDs)
Key Function
6 Status Shows operational information. D. Operation keys and reset
Allows access to programming parameters Operation keys are at the bottom of the LCP.
Quick
7 for initial set-up instructions and many
Menu Key Function
detailed application instructions.
Allows access to all programming Starts the frequency converter in hand-on
8 Main Menu mode.
parameters.
Shows a list of current warnings, the last 10 18 Hand On • An external stop signal by control input
9 Alarm Log or serial communication overrides the
alarms, and the maintenance log.
local hand on.
Table 3.9 Legend to Illustration 3.9, Display Menu Keys Stops the motor but does not remove power
19 Off
to the frequency converter.
C. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs)
Puts the system in remote operational mode.
Navigation keys are used for programming functions and
• Responds to an external start command
moving the display cursor. The navigation keys also 20 Auto On by control terminals or serial communi-
provide speed control in local operation. There are also 3
cation.
frequency converter status indicator lights in this area.
Resets the frequency converter manually
21 Reset
Key Function after a fault has been cleared.
Reverts to the previous step or list in the
10 Back Table 3.12 Legend to Illustration 3.9, Operation Keys and Reset
menu structure.
Cancels the last change or command as long
11 Cancel
as the display mode has not changed. NOTICE
Press for a definition of the function being To adjust the display contrast, press [Status] and the
12 Info
shown. [▲]/[▼] keys.
Navigation To move between items in the menu, use the
13
keys 4 navigation keys.
Press to access parameter groups or to
14 OK
enable a selection.

Table 3.10 Legend to Illustration 3.9, Navigation Keys

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 19

 Programming VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

3.1.7 Changing Parameter Settings with

130BD532.10
GLCP

Access and change parameter settings from the Quick

Menu or from the Main Menu. The Quick Menu only gives

3 3 access to a limited number of parameters.

1. Press [Quick Menu] or [Main Menu] on the LCP.

2. Press [▲] [▼] to browse through the parameter
groups, press [OK] to select a parameter group.
3. Press [▲] [▼] to browse through the parameters,
press [OK] to select a parameter.
4. Press [▲] [▼] to change the value of a parameter
setting.
5. Press [◄] [►] to shift digit when a decimal
parameter is in the editing state.
6. Press [OK] to accept the change.
7. Press either [Back] twice to enter Status, or press
[Main Menu] once to enter the Main Menu.
View changes
Quick Menu Q5 - Changes Made lists all parameters Illustration 3.10 GLCP Adapter and Connecting Cable
changed from default settings.
• The list only shows parameters which have been
changed in the current edit set-up. 3.1.9 Backing Up/Downloading Parameters
with LCP
• Parameters which have been reset to default
values are not listed.
Establishing the correct programming for applications
• The message Empty indicates that no parameters often requires setting functions in several related
have been changed. parameters. Parameter details are provided in
chapter 4 Parameter Descriptions.
3.1.8 Mounting the GLCP
Programming data is stored internally in the frequency
Use the GLCP adapter (ordering number: 132B0281) and a converter.
cable to connect the LCP 102 to the frequency converter,
as shown in Illustration 3.10.
• For back-up, upload data into the LCP memory.
• To download data to another frequency
converter, connect the LCP to that unit and
download the stored settings.
• Restoring factory default settings does not
change data stored in the LCP memory.
Back-up/download process
1. Press [Off] on the GLCP or [Off Reset] on the
NLCP to stop the motor before uploading or
downloading data.
2. Press [Main Menu] parameter 0-50 LCP Copy and
press [OK].
3. Select [1] All to LCP to upload data to the LCP, or
select [2] All from LCP to download data from the
LCP, or select [3] Size indep. from LCP to download
motor size independent parameters from LCP.

20 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Programming Programming Guide

4. Press [OK]. A progress bar shows the uploading or Manual initialization does not reset the following
downloading progress. frequency converter information:
5. Press [Hand On] or [Auto On] to return to normal • Parameter 0-03 Regional Settings
operation. • Parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction
• Parameter 15-00 Operating hours
3.1.10 Restoring Default Settings with LCP
• Parameter 15-03 Power Up's 3 3
NOTICE • Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's

Risk of losing programming, motor data, localization, and • Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's
monitoring records by restoration of default settings. To • Parameter 15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code
provide a back-up, upload data to the LCP before initiali-
zation. 3.2 Basic Programming
3.2.1 Asynchronous Motor Set-up
Restoring the default parameter settings is done by initiali-
zation of the frequency converter. Initialization is carried
Enter the following motor data in the listed order. Find the
out through parameter 14-22 Operation Mode
information on the motor nameplate.
(recommended) or manually. Initialization does not reset
the settings for parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction and
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings. 1. Parameter 1-20 Motor Power.
2. Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage.
• Initialization using parameter 14-22 Operation 3. Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.
Mode does not reset frequency converter settings,
4. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
such as operating hours, serial communication
selections, fault log, alarm log, and other 5. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
monitoring functions.
For optimum performance in VVC+ mode, extra motor data
• Manual initialization erases all motor, is required to set up the following parameters.
programming, localization, and monitoring data,
and restores factory default settings. 6. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs).
Recommended initialization procedure, via 7. Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr).
parameter 14-22 Operation Mode
8. Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1).
1. Select parameter 14-22 Operation Mode and press
[OK]. 9. Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh).
2. Select [2] Initialisation and press [OK]. The data is found in the motor datasheet (this data is
typically not available on the motor nameplate). Run a
3. Remove power to the unit and wait until the
complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
display turns off.
Adaption (AMA) [1] Enable Complete AMA or enter the
4. Apply power to the unit. parameters manually.
Default parameter settings are restored during start-up.
This may take slightly longer than normal. Application-specific adjustment when running VVC+
VVC+ is the most robust control mode. In most situations,
5. Alarm 80, Drive initialized to default value is shown. it provides optimum performance without further
6. Press [Reset] to return to operating mode. adjustments. Run a complete AMA for best performance.

Manual initialization procedure

1. Remove power to the unit and wait until the
3.2.2 PM Motor Set-up in VVC+
display turns off.
Initial programming steps
2. Press and hold [Status], [Main Menu], and [OK] at 1. Set parameter 1-10 Motor Construction to the
the same time on the GLCP, or press [Menu] and following options to activate PM motor operation:
[OK] at the same time on the NLCP while
applying power to the unit (approximately 5 s or 1a [1] PM, non salient SPM
until a click is heard and the fan starts). 1b [3] PM, salient IPM
Factory default parameter settings are restored during 2. Select [0] Open Loop in parameter 1-00 Configu-
start-up. This may take slightly longer than normal. ration Mode.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 21

 Programming VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

NOTICE maximum phase-to-phase inductance value.

Encoder feedback is not supported for PM motors. Divide the value by 2 and enter the result.
4. Parameter 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat).
Programming motor data This parameter is active only when
When the initial programming steps are completed, the PM parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [3] PM,

3 3 motor-related parameters in parameter groups 1-2* Motor

Data, 1-3* Adv. Motor Data, and 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II are
salient IPM.
This parameter corresponds to the saturation
active. inductance of d-axis. The default value is the
The information is on the motor nameplate and in the value set in parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).
motor datasheet. Do not change the default value in most cases. If
the motor supplier provides the saturation curve,
Program the following parameters in the listed order:
enter the d-axis inductance value, which is 100%
1. Parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
of the nominal current.
2. Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque.
5. Parameter 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat).
3. Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. This parameter is active only when
4. Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles. parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [3] PM,
salient IPM.
5. Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM. This parameter corresponds to the saturation
6. Parameter 1-42 Motor Cable Length. inductance of q-axis. The default value is the
value set in parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq).
Run a complete AMA using parameter 1-29 Automatic
In most cases, do not change the default. If the
Motor Adaption (AMA) and select [1] Enable Complete AMA.
motor supplier provides the saturation curve,
If a complete AMA is not performed successfully, configure
enter the q-axis inductance value, which is 100%
the following parameters manually.
of the nominal current.

1. Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs). Test motor operation

Enter phase common stator winding resistance 1. Start the motor at low speed (100–200 RPM). If
(Rs). If only phase-to-phase data is available, the motor does not run, check installation,
divide the phase-to-phase value by 2 to achieve general programming, and motor data.
the phase value.
2. Check if the start function in parameter 1-70 Start
It is also possible to measure the value with an
Mode fits the application requirements.
ohmmeter, which also takes the resistance of the
cable into account. Divide the measured value by Rotor detection
2 and enter the result. This function is the recommended selection for
applications where the motor starts from standstill, for
2. Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).
example pumps or conveyors. For some motors, a sound is
Enter direct axis inductance of the PM motor.
heard when the frequency converter performs the rotor
If only phase-to-phase data is available, divide the
detection. This sound does not harm the motor. Adjust the
phase-to-phase value by 2 to achieve the phase
value in parameter 1-46 Position Detection Gain for different
value.
motors. If the frequency converter fails to start, or an
It is also possible to measure the value with an
overcurrent alarm occurs when the frequency converter
inductance meter, which also takes the
starts, check if the rotor is blocked or not. If the rotor is
inductance of the cable into account. Divide the
not blocked, set parameter 1-70 Start Mode to [1] Parking
measured value by 2 and enter the result.
and try again.
3. Parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq).
Parking
This parameter is active only when
This function is the recommended option for applications
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [3] PM,
where the motor is rotating at low speed, for example
salient IPM.
windmilling in fan applications. Parameter 2-06 Parking
Enter the quadrature axis inductance of the PM
Current and parameter 2-07 Parking Time are adjustable.
motor. If only phase-to-phase data is available,
Increase the factory setting of these parameters for
divide the phase-to-phase value by 2 to achieve
applications with high inertia.
the phase value.
It is also possible to measure the value with an Start the motor at nominal speed. If the application does
inductance meter, which also takes the not run well, check the VVC+ PM settings. Table 3.13 shows
inductance of the cable into account. Make 1 recommendations in different applications.
rotation of the motor’s rotor and find the

22 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Programming Programming Guide

Application Settings To run AMA using the numeric LCP

Low inertia applications • Increase the value for 1. By default parameter setting, connect terminals
ILoad1)/IMotor2) <5 parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time 12 and 27 before running AMA.
const. by factor 5 to 10. 2. Enter the Main Menu.
• Reduce the value for
3. Go to parameter group 1-** Load and Motor.

•
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain.

Reduce the value (<100%) for

4. Press [OK]. 3 3
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at 5. Set motor parameters using nameplate data for
Low Speed. parameter group 1-2* Motor Data.

Medium inertia Keep calculated values. 6. Set parameter 1-39 Motor Poles for IM and PM.
applications 7. Set parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM for PM.
50>ILoad/IMotor >5
8. Set motor cable length in parameter 1-42 Motor
High inertia applications Increase the values for
Cable Length.
ILoad/IMotor > 50 parameter 1-14 Damping Gain,
parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time 9. Go to parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
Const., and parameter 1-16 High (AMA).
Speed Filter Time Const. 10. Press [OK].
High load at low speed Decrease parameter 1-17 Voltage
11. Select [1] Enable complete AMA.
<30% (rated speed) filter time const.
Decrease parameter 1-66 Min. Current 12. Press [OK].
at Low Speed (>100% for longer time 13. Press [Hand On] to activate AMA.
can overheat the motor).
14. The test runs automatically and indicates when it
Table 3.13 Recommendations in Different Applications is complete.
1) ILoad = The inertia of load. Depending on the power size, the AMA takes 3–10
2) IMotor = The inertia of motor. minutes to complete.

If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase

parameter 1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small NOTICE
steps. The AMA function does not cause the motor to run, and
it does not harm the motor.
Adjust the starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at
Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting
torque.

3.2.3 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

It is highly recommended to run AMA because it measures

the electrical characteristics of the motor to optimize
compatibility between the frequency converter and the
motor under VVC+ mode.

• The frequency converter builds a mathematical

model of the motor for regulating output motor
current, thus enhancing motor performance.
• Some motors are unable to run the complete
version of the test. In that case, select Enable
reduced AMA (not for PM).
• If warnings or alarms occur, see
chapter 6.1.3 Warning/alarm Messages.
• Run this procedure on a cold motor for best
results.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 23

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4 Parameter Descriptions

4.1 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 0-06 GridType

Option: Function:
Parameters related to the basic functions of the frequency
converter, function of the LCP keys, and configuration of NOTICE
the LCP display. Not all options are supported in
4 4 4.1.1 0-0* Basic Settings
all power sizes.

IT grid is a supply mains where the

neutral point of secondary side of the
0-01 Language
transformer is not connected to
Option: Function: ground.
[0] * English
Delta is a supply mains where the
[10] Chinese
secondary part of the transformer is
[28] Portuguese
delta-connected and 1 phase is
0-03 Regional Settings connected to ground.

Option: Function: [10] 380-440V/50Hz/IT-

NOTICE grid
[11] 380-440V/50Hz/
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Delta
the motor is running.
[12] 380-440V/50Hz
[20] 440-480V/50Hz/IT-
[0] Interna- Activate parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
grid
tional setting the motor power in kW and set the
[21] 440-480V/50Hz/
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
Delta
to 50 Hz.
[22] 440-480V/50Hz
[1] US Activate parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for [110] 380-440V/60Hz/IT-
setting the motor power in hp and set the default grid
value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency to 60 Hz. [111] 380-440V/60Hz/
Delta
0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) [112] 380-440V/60Hz
Option: Function: [120] 440-480V/60Hz/IT-
Select the operating mode upon grid
reconnection of the frequency converter to [121] 440-480V/60Hz/
mains voltage after power-down in hand-on Delta
mode. [122] 440-480V/60Hz
[0] Resume Restart the frequency converter, maintaining
0-07 Auto DC Braking
the start/stop settings (applied by [Hand On/
Option: Function:
Off]) selected before power-down of the
frequency converter. Protective function against overvoltage at coast in IT
grid environment. This parameter is active only when
[1] * Forced stop, Restart the frequency converter with a saved
[1] On is selected in this parameter.
ref=old local reference after mains voltage reappears
and after pressing [Hand On]. [0] Off This function is not active.

[2] Forced stop, Reset the local reference to 0 upon restarting [1] * On This function is active.
ref=0 the frequency converter.

0-06 GridType
Option: Function:
Select the grid type of the supply
voltage/frequency.

24 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.1.2 0-1* Set-up Operations 0-11 Programming Set-up

Option: Function:
Define and control the individual parameter set-ups. Select the set-up to be programmed during
The frequency converter has 2 parameter set-ups that can operation; either the active set-up or the
be programmed independently of each other. This makes inactive set-up. The set-up number being
the frequency converter flexible and able to solve edited flashes in the LCP.
advanced control functionality problems, often saving the
cost of external control equipment. For example, the 2 set- [1] Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [2] Set-up 2 can be edited freely
during operation, independently of the active
4 4
ups can be used to program the frequency converter to
operate according to 1 control scheme in 1 set-up (for set-up.
example, motor 1 for horizontal movement) and another [2] Set-up 2
control scheme in another set-up (for example, motor 2 for [9] * Active The set-up in which the frequency converter is
vertical movement). Alternatively, they can be used by an Set-up operating can also be edited during operation.
OEM machine builder to program all their factory-fitted
frequency converters for different machine types within a 0-12 Link Setups
range to have the same parameters and then during
Option: Function:
production/commissioning simply select a specific set-up,
The link ensures synchronizing of the Not
depending on which machine the frequency converter is
changeable during operation parameter values
installed on.
enabling shift from 1 set-up to another during
The active set-up (that is, the set-up in which the
operation.
frequency converter is operating) can be selected in
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up and is shown in the LCP. By If the set-ups are not linked, a change between
selecting [9] Multi set-up, it is possible to switch between them is not possible while the motor is running.
set-ups with the frequency converter running or stopped, Thus the set-up change does not occur until the
via digital input or serial communication commands. If it is motor is coasted.
necessary to change set-ups while running, ensure that [0] Not Leave parameters unchanged in both set-ups.
parameter 0-12 Link Setups is set as required. Use linked These parameters cannot be changed while the
parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up to edit parameters motor is running.
within any of the set-ups while continuing the operation of
the frequency converter in its active set-up, which can be a [20] * Linked Copy Not changeable during operation
different set-up to that being edited. Use parameters from 1 set-up to the other, so they
parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy parameter settings are identical in both set-ups.
between the set-ups to enable quicker commissioning if
similar parameter settings are required in different set-ups. 0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
Range: Function:
0-10 Active Set-up
0* [-2147483647 - View the setting of
Option: Function: 2147483647 ] parameter 0-11 Programming Set-up. Edit
Select the set-up in which the frequency converter set-up for each communication channel. A
is to operate. Select parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to means active set-up; F means factory;
copy a set-up to 1 or all set-ups. To avoid numbers indicate set-up code. Communi-
conflicting settings of the same parameter within cation channels from right to left are LCP,
2 different set-ups, link the set-ups together in FC-bus, USB, and HPFB1-5.
parameter 0-12 Link Setups. Stop the frequency
converter before switching between set-ups where 0-16 Application Selection
the parameters marked Not changeable during
Option: Function:
operation have different values. Parameters which
Select integrated application
are Not changeable during operation are marked
functions. When an application
FALSE in the parameter lists in chapter 5 Parameter
is selected, a set of related
Lists.
parameters are set automat-
[1] * Set-up Set-up 1 is active. ically.
1
[0] * None
[2] Set-up Set-up 2 is active.
[1] Simple Process Close Loop
2
[2] Local/Remote
[9] Multi This option is used for remote set-up selections
[3] Speed Open Loop
Set-up via digital inputs and the serial communication
[4] Simple Speed Close Loop
port. This set-up uses the settings from
parameter 0-12 Link Setups. [5] Multi Speed

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 25

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

0-16 Application Selection 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option: Function: Select a variable to be shown in line 1, left position.
[6] OGD LA10 Option: Function:
[7] OGD V210 [1661] Terminal 53 Setting
[8] Hoist [1662] Analog input 53
[9] Hoist Speed Close Loop [1663] Terminal 54 Setting
[1664] Analog input 54
4.1.3 0-2* LCP Display [1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
4 4 [1666] Digital Output
Use parameters in this group to define the variables that [1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
are shown in the GLCP. Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM] is 1 [1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
option for each parameter in parameter group 0-2* LCP [1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
Display. [1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz]
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small [1671] Relay output
[1672] Counter A
Select a variable to be shown in line 1, left position.
[1673] Counter B
Option: Function:
[1679] Analog output 45 [mA]
[0] None
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[37] Display Text 1
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[38] Display Text 2
[1684] Comm. Option STW
[39] Display Text 3
[1685] FC Port CTW 1
[748] PCD Feed Forward
[1686] FC Port REF 1
[953] Profibus Warning Word
[1690] Alarm Word
[1501] Running Hours
[1691] Alarm Word 2
[1502] kWh Counter
[1692] Warning Word
[1600] Control Word
[1693] Warning Word 2
[1601] Reference [Unit]
[1694] Ext. Status Word
[1602] * Reference [%]
[1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1603] Status Word
[1697] Alarm Word 3
[1605] Main Actual Value [%]
[1890] Process PID Error
[1609] Custom Readout
[1891] Process PID Output
[1610] Power [kW]
[1892] Process PID Clamped Output
[1611] Power [hp]
[1893] Process PID Gain Scaled Output
[1612] Motor Voltage
[2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
[1613] Frequency
[2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[1614] Motor current
[2119] Ext. 1 Output [%]
[1615] Frequency [%]
[3401] PCD 1 Write For Application
[1616] Torque [Nm]
[3402] PCD 2 Write For Application
[1617] Speed [RPM]
[3403] PCD 3 Write For Application
[1618] Motor Thermal
[3404] PCD 4 Write For Application
[1622] Torque [%]
[3405] PCD 5 Write For Application
[1630] DC Link Voltage
[3406] PCD 6 Write For Application
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min
[3407] PCD 7 Write For Application
[1634] Heatsink Temp.
[3408] PCD 8 Write For Application
[1635] Inverter Thermal
[3409] PCD 9 Write For Application
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current
[3410] PCD 10 Write For Application
[1637] Inv. Max. Current
[3421] PCD 1 Read For Application
[1638] SL Controller State
[3422] PCD 2 Read For Application
[1639] Control Card Temp.
[3423] PCD 3 Read For Application
[1650] External Reference
[3424] PCD 4 Read For Application
[1652] Feedback[Unit]
[3425] PCD 5 Read For Application
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
[3426] PCD 6 Read For Application
[1657] Feedback [RPM]
[3427] PCD 7 Read For Application
[1660] Digital Input
[3428] PCD 8 Read For Application

26 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small
Select a variable to be shown in line 1, left position. Select a variable to be shown in line 1, middle position.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[3429] PCD 9 Read For Application [1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
[3430] PCD 10 Read For Application [1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
[3450] Actual Position [1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
[3456] Track Error [1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz]
[1671] Relay output
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small
Select a variable to be shown in line 1, middle position.
[1672] Counter A 4 4
[1673] Counter B
Option: Function: [1679] Analog output 45 [mA]
[0] None [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[37] Display Text 1 [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[38] Display Text 2 [1684] Comm. Option STW
[39] Display Text 3 [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1686] FC Port REF 1
[953] Profibus Warning Word [1690] Alarm Word
[1501] Running Hours [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1502] kWh Counter [1692] Warning Word
[1600] Control Word [1693] Warning Word 2
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1602] Reference [%] [1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1603] Status Word [1697] Alarm Word 3
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1890] Process PID Error
[1609] Custom Readout [1891] Process PID Output
[1610] Power [kW] [1892] Process PID Clamped Output
[1611] Power [hp] [1893] Process PID Gain Scaled Output
[1612] Motor Voltage [2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
[1613] Frequency [2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[1614] * Motor current [2119] Ext. 1 Output [%]
[1615] Frequency [%] [3401] PCD 1 Write For Application
[1616] Torque [Nm] [3402] PCD 2 Write For Application
[1617] Speed [RPM] [3403] PCD 3 Write For Application
[1618] Motor Thermal [3404] PCD 4 Write For Application
[1622] Torque [%] [3405] PCD 5 Write For Application
[1630] DC Link Voltage [3406] PCD 6 Write For Application
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [3407] PCD 7 Write For Application
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3408] PCD 8 Write For Application
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3409] PCD 9 Write For Application
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current [3410] PCD 10 Write For Application
[1637] Inv. Max. Current [3421] PCD 1 Read For Application
[1638] SL Controller State [3422] PCD 2 Read For Application
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3423] PCD 3 Read For Application
[1650] External Reference [3424] PCD 4 Read For Application
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3425] PCD 5 Read For Application
[1653] Digi Pot Reference [3426] PCD 6 Read For Application
[1657] Feedback [RPM] [3427] PCD 7 Read For Application
[1660] Digital Input [3428] PCD 8 Read For Application
[1661] Terminal 53 Setting [3429] PCD 9 Read For Application
[1662] Analog input 53 [3430] PCD 10 Read For Application
[1663] Terminal 54 Setting [3450] Actual Position
[1664] Analog input 54 [3456] Track Error
[1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 27

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small
Select a variable to be shown in line 1, right position. Select a variable to be shown in line 1, right position.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] None [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[37] Display Text 1 [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[38] Display Text 2 [1684] Comm. Option STW
[39] Display Text 3 [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1686] FC Port REF 1
4 4 [953] Profibus Warning Word [1690] Alarm Word
[1501] Running Hours [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1502] kWh Counter [1692] Warning Word
[1600] Control Word [1693] Warning Word 2
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1602] Reference [%] [1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1603] Status Word [1697] Alarm Word 3
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1890] Process PID Error
[1609] Custom Readout [1891] Process PID Output
[1610] * Power [kW] [1892] Process PID Clamped Output
[1611] Power [hp] [1893] Process PID Gain Scaled Output
[1612] Motor Voltage [2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
[1613] Frequency [2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[1614] Motor current [2119] Ext. 1 Output [%]
[1615] Frequency [%] [3401] PCD 1 Write For Application
[1616] Torque [Nm] [3402] PCD 2 Write For Application
[1617] Speed [RPM] [3403] PCD 3 Write For Application
[1618] Motor Thermal [3404] PCD 4 Write For Application
[1622] Torque [%] [3405] PCD 5 Write For Application
[1630] DC Link Voltage [3406] PCD 6 Write For Application
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [3407] PCD 7 Write For Application
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3408] PCD 8 Write For Application
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3409] PCD 9 Write For Application
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current [3410] PCD 10 Write For Application
[1637] Inv. Max. Current [3421] PCD 1 Read For Application
[1638] SL Controller State [3422] PCD 2 Read For Application
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3423] PCD 3 Read For Application
[1650] External Reference [3424] PCD 4 Read For Application
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3425] PCD 5 Read For Application
[1653] Digi Pot Reference [3426] PCD 6 Read For Application
[1657] Feedback [RPM] [3427] PCD 7 Read For Application
[1660] Digital Input [3428] PCD 8 Read For Application
[1661] Terminal 53 Setting [3429] PCD 9 Read For Application
[1662] Analog input 53 [3430] PCD 10 Read For Application
[1663] Terminal 54 Setting [3450] Actual Position
[1664] Analog input 54 [3456] Track Error
[1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output
[1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
[1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
[1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
[1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz]
[1671] Relay output
[1672] Counter A
[1673] Counter B
[1679] Analog output 45 [mA]

28 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

0-23 Display Line 2 Large 0-23 Display Line 2 Large

Select a variable to be shown in line 2. Select a variable to be shown in line 2.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] None [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[37] Display Text 1 [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[38] Display Text 2 [1684] Comm. Option STW
[39] Display Text 3 [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1686] FC Port REF 1
[953] Profibus Warning Word [1690] Alarm Word 4 4
[1501] Running Hours [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1502] kWh Counter [1692] Warning Word
[1600] Control Word [1693] Warning Word 2
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1602] Reference [%] [1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1603] Status Word [1697] Alarm Word 3
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1890] Process PID Error
[1609] Custom Readout [1891] Process PID Output
[1610] Power [kW] [1892] Process PID Clamped Output
[1611] Power [hp] [1893] Process PID Gain Scaled Output
[1612] Motor Voltage [2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
[1613] * Frequency [2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[1614] Motor current [2119] Ext. 1 Output [%]
[1615] Frequency [%] [3401] PCD 1 Write For Application
[1616] Torque [Nm] [3402] PCD 2 Write For Application
[1617] Speed [RPM] [3403] PCD 3 Write For Application
[1618] Motor Thermal [3404] PCD 4 Write For Application
[1622] Torque [%] [3405] PCD 5 Write For Application
[1630] DC Link Voltage [3406] PCD 6 Write For Application
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [3407] PCD 7 Write For Application
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3408] PCD 8 Write For Application
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3409] PCD 9 Write For Application
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current [3410] PCD 10 Write For Application
[1637] Inv. Max. Current [3421] PCD 1 Read For Application
[1638] SL Controller State [3422] PCD 2 Read For Application
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3423] PCD 3 Read For Application
[1650] External Reference [3424] PCD 4 Read For Application
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3425] PCD 5 Read For Application
[1653] Digi Pot Reference [3426] PCD 6 Read For Application
[1657] Feedback [RPM] [3427] PCD 7 Read For Application
[1660] Digital Input [3428] PCD 8 Read For Application
[1661] Terminal 53 Setting [3429] PCD 9 Read For Application
[1662] Analog input 53 [3430] PCD 10 Read For Application
[1663] Terminal 54 Setting [3450] Actual Position
[1664] Analog input 54 [3456] Track Error
[1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output
[1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
[1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
[1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
[1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz]
[1671] Relay output
[1672] Counter A
[1673] Counter B
[1679] Analog output 45 [mA]

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 29

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

0-24 Display Line 3 Large 0-24 Display Line 3 Large

Select a variable to be shown in line 3. Select a variable to be shown in line 3.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] None [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[37] Display Text 1 [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[38] Display Text 2 [1684] Comm. Option STW
[39] Display Text 3 [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1686] FC Port REF 1
4 4 [953] Profibus Warning Word [1690] Alarm Word
[1501] Running Hours [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1502] * kWh Counter [1692] Warning Word
[1600] Control Word [1693] Warning Word 2
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1602] Reference [%] [1695] Ext. Status Word 2
[1603] Status Word [1697] Alarm Word 3
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1890] Process PID Error
[1609] Custom Readout [1891] Process PID Output
[1610] Power [kW] [1892] Process PID Clamped Output
[1611] Power [hp] [1893] Process PID Gain Scaled Output
[1612] Motor Voltage [2117] Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
[1613] Frequency [2118] Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[1614] Motor current [2119] Ext. 1 Output [%]
[1615] Frequency [%] [3401] PCD 1 Write For Application
[1616] Torque [Nm] [3402] PCD 2 Write For Application
[1617] Speed [RPM] [3403] PCD 3 Write For Application
[1618] Motor Thermal [3404] PCD 4 Write For Application
[1622] Torque [%] [3405] PCD 5 Write For Application
[1630] DC Link Voltage [3406] PCD 6 Write For Application
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [3407] PCD 7 Write For Application
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3408] PCD 8 Write For Application
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3409] PCD 9 Write For Application
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current [3410] PCD 10 Write For Application
[1637] Inv. Max. Current [3421] PCD 1 Read For Application
[1638] SL Controller State [3422] PCD 2 Read For Application
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3423] PCD 3 Read For Application
[1650] External Reference [3424] PCD 4 Read For Application
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3425] PCD 5 Read For Application
[1653] Digi Pot Reference [3426] PCD 6 Read For Application
[1657] Feedback [RPM] [3427] PCD 7 Read For Application
[1660] Digital Input [3428] PCD 8 Read For Application
[1661] Terminal 53 Setting [3429] PCD 9 Read For Application
[1662] Analog input 53 [3430] PCD 10 Read For Application
[1663] Terminal 54 Setting [3450] Actual Position
[1664] Analog input 54 [3456] Track Error
[1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
[1666] Digital Output
[1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
[1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
[1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
[1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz]
[1671] Relay output
[1672] Counter A
[1673] Counter B
[1679] Analog output 45 [mA]

30 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.1.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout 0-30 Custom Readout Unit

Option: Function:
It is possible to customize the display elements in the LCP. Set a value to be shown in the LCP. The value has
a linear, squared, or cubed relation to speed. This
Custom readout relation depends on the unit selected. See
The calculated value to be shown is based on settings in Table 4.1. The actual calculated value can be read
parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit, in parameter 16-09 Custom Readout.
parameter 0-31 Custom Readout Min Value (linear only),
[0] None
parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max Value,
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz], and actual
[1] * % 4 4
speed. [5] PPM
[10] 1/min

130BD380.10
Custom Readout (Value)
[11] RPM
P 16-09 [12] Pulse/s
Custom Readout
Unit P 0-30 [20] l/s
Max value
P 0-32 [21] l/min
[22] l/h
w)
flo
nd [23] m³/s
da
ee e)
. Sp ur [24] m³/min
e.g ss
it ( re
Un (P ) [25] m³/h
r nit er
ea U ow
Lin at
ic
t (P [30] kg/s
a dr ni
Min value Qu cU [31] kg/min
bi
Liniar Cu Motor Speed
units only [32] kg/h
P 0-31
0
Motor Speed [33] t/min
High limit
P 4-14 (Hz)
[34] t/h
[40] m/s
Illustration 4.1 Custom Readout [41] m/min
[45] m
[60] °C
The relation depends on the type of unit selected in [70] mbar
parameter 0-30 Custom Readout Unit: [71] bar
[72] Pa
Unit type Speed relation
[73] kPa
Dimensionless
[74] m WG
Speed
[80] kW
Flow, volume
[120] GPM
Flow, mass Linear
[121] gal/s
Velocity
[122] gal/min
Length
[123] gal/h
Temperature
[124] CFM
Pressure Quadratic
[127] ft³/h
Power Cubic
[140] ft/s
Table 4.1 Relation between Unit Type and Speed [141] ft/min
[160] °F
[170] psi
[171] lb/in2
[172] in WG
[173] ft WG
[180] HP

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 31

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

0-31 Custom Readout Min Value 0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP

Range: Function: Option: Function:
0 CustomRea- [0 - This parameter sets the [0] Disabled Select [0] Disabled to avoid accidental stop
doutUnit* 999999.99 minimum value of the custom or reset of the frequency converter from
CustomRea- readout (occurs at 0 speed). It is LCP. Setting can be locked by
doutUnit] only possible to select a value parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
different from 0 when selecting a
[1] * Enabled
linear unit in
[7] Enable Reset
4 4 parameter 0-30 Custom Readout
Unit. For quadratic and cubic
Only

units, the minimum value is 0.

4.1.6 0-5* Copy/Save
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value
Range: Function: Copy parameters from and to the NLCP and GLCP. Use
these parameters for saving and copying set-ups from 1
100 Custom- [ 0.0 - This parameter sets the
frequency converter to another.
ReadoutUnit* 999999.99 maximum value to be shown
CustomRea- when the motor speed has 0-50 LCP Copy
doutUnit] reached the value set in Option: Function:
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed
[0] * No copy No function.
High Limit [Hz].
[1] All to LCP Copy all parameters in all set-ups from the
0-37 Display Text 1 frequency converter memory to the LCP. For
service purposes, copy all parameters to the
Range: Function:
LCP after commissioning.
[0 - 0 ] Free text, for example used for the device tag of
fieldbus application. [2] All from Copy all parameters in all set-ups from the LCP
LCP memory to the frequency converter memory.
0-38 Display Text 2 [3] Size indep. Copy only the parameters that are
Range: Function: from LCP independent of the motor size. This selection
[0 - 0 ] Free text, for example used for the location tag of can be used to program several frequency
fieldbus application. converters with the same function without
disturbing motor data that is already set.
0-39 Display Text 3
0-51 Set-up Copy
Range: Function:
[0 - 0 ] Free text, for example used for the help tag of
Option: Function:
fieldbus application. [0] * No copy No function.

[1] Copy from Copy from set-up 1 to set-up 2.

setup 1
4.1.5 0-4* LCP Keypad
[2] Copy from Copy from set-up 2 to set-up 1.
setup 2
Enable, disable, and password protect individual keys on
[9] Copy from Copy factory setting to programming set-
the LCP.
Factory setup up (selected in parameter 0-11 Programming
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP Set-up).
Option: Function:
[0] Disabled Avoid accidental start of the frequency converter 4.1.7 0-6* Password
in hand-on mode.

[1] * Enabled [Hand On] is enabled. 0-60 Main Menu Password

Range: Function:
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP
0* [0 - 999 ] Define the password for access to the Main Menu
Option: Function: via the [Main Menu] key. Setting values to 0
[0] Disabled Avoid accidental start of the freqeuncy converter disables the password function.
from LCP.

[1] * Enabled [Hand On] is enabled.

32 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.2 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 1-01 Motor Control Principle
Option: Function:
4.2.1 1-0* General Settings
[0] U/f NOTICE
1-00 Configuration Mode When running U/f, control slip and load
compensations are not included.
Option: Function:
Select the application control principle to be
Used for parallel-connected motors and/or special
used when a remote reference (that is, via
motor applications. Set the U/f settings in
analog input or fieldbus) is active.
parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U and 4 4
[0] Open Loop Enables speed control (without feedback signal parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F.
* from motor) with automatic slip compensation
for almost constant speed at varying loads.
[1] * VVC+ NOTICE
Compensations are active, but can be disabled When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is
in parameter group 1-** Load and Motor. set to PM-enabled options, only VVC+ option
is available.
[1] Speed Enables speed closed-loop control with
closed loop feedback. For increased speed accuracy,
Normal running mode, including slip and load
provide a feedback signal and set the speed
compensations.
PID control. The speed control parameters are
set in parameter group 7-0* Speed PID Control.
1-03 Torque Characteristics
[2] Torque Enables torque closed-loop control with speed
Option: Function:
closed loop feedback. Only possible when option [1] VVC+
Select the torque characteristic required. VT
is selected in parameter 1-01 Motor Control
and AEO are both energy-saving operations.
Principle.
[0] * Constant Motor shaft output provides constant torque
[3] Process Enables the use of process control in the
torque under variable speed control.
Closed frequency converter. The process control
Loop parameters are set in parameter group 7-2* [1] Variable Motor shaft output provides variable torque
Process Ctrl. Feedback and parameter group 7-3* Torque under variable speed control. Set the variable
Process PID Ctrl. torque level in parameter 14-40 VT Level.

[4] Torque Enables the use of torque open loop in VVC+ [2] Auto Energy Automatically optimizes energy consumption
open loop mode (parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle). Optim. CT by minimizing magnetization and frequency
The torque PID parameters are set in parameter via parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum Magneti-
group 7-1* Torque PI Control. sation.

[6] Surface Enables the use of surface winder control.

1-06 Clockwise Direction
Winder Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2*
Process Ctrl. Feedb. and parameter group 7-3* Option: Function:
Process PID Ctrl. NOTICE
[7] Extended Enables the use of extended PID speed OL. This parameter cannot be adjusted while
PID Speed Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2* the motor is running.
OL Process Ctrl. Feedb. to parameter group 7-5* Ext.
Process PID Ctrl. This parameter defines the term clockwise
corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for
easy change of direction of shaft rotation without
swapping motor wires.

[0] * Normal The motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when

frequency converter is connected U⇒U; V⇒V; and
W⇒W to motor.

[1] Inverse The motor shaft turns in counterclockwise

direction when frequency converter is connected
U⇒U; V⇒V; and W⇒W to motor.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 33

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1-08 Motor Control Bandwidth 1-08 Motor Control Bandwidth

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] High Suitable for high dynamic response. [3] Adaptive 1 Optimized for smooth steady-state operation,
[1] * Medium Suitable for smooth steady-state operation. with extra active damping.
[2] Low Suitable for smooth steady-state operation with [4] Adaptive 2 Focus on low-inductance PM motors. This
lowest dynamic response. option is an alternative to [3] Adaptive 1.

4.2.2 1-1* Motor Selection

4 4 Parameter group for setting general motor data. The parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

The active parameters are shown in Table 4.2. x indicates that a particular parameter is active when the option is selected.

Parameter 1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron [1] PM, non salient SPM [3] PM, salient IPM
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode x x x
Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics x
Parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction x x x
Parameter 1-08 Motor Control Bandwidth x x x
Parameter 1-14 Damping Gain x x
Parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. x x
Parameter 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. x x
Parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time const. x x
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] x
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage x
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency x
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current x x x
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed x x x
Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque x x
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaption (AMA) x x x
Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) x x x
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) x
Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) x
Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) x
Parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) x x
Parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) x
Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles x x x
Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM x x
Parameter 1-42 Motor Cable Length x x x
Parameter 1-43 Motor Cable Length Feet x x x
Parameter 1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) x
Parameter 1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) x
Parameter 1-46 Position Detection Gain x x
Parameter 1-48 Current at Min Inductance for d-axis x
Parameter 1-49 Current at Min Inductance for q-axis x
Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed x
Parameter 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] x
Parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U x
Parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F x
Parameter 1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation x
Parameter 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation x
Parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation x
Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant x
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening x
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant x

34 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

Parameter 1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron [1] PM, non salient SPM [3] PM, salient IPM
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed x x
Parameter 1-70 Start Mode x x
Parameter 1-71 Start Delay x x x
Parameter 1-72 Start Function x x x
Parameter 1-73 Flying Start x x x
Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop x x x
Parameter 1-88 AC Brake Gain x
Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current
x
x
x
x
x
x
4 4
Parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current x x x
Parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time x x x
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] x x x
Parameter 2-06 Parking Current x x
Parameter 2-07 Parking Time x x
Parameter 2-10 Brake Function x x x
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current x
Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage Control x x x
Parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction x x x
Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] x x x
Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode x
Parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode x
Parameter 4-18 Current Limit x x x
Parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency x x x
Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function x x x
Parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency x x x
Parameter 14-03 Overmodulation x x x
Parameter 14-07 Dead Time Compensation Level x x x
Parameter 14-08 Damping Gain Factor x x x
Parameter 14-09 Dead Time Bias Current Level x x x
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure x
Parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level x
Parameter 14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance x x x
Parameter 14-27 Action At Inverter Fault x x x
Parameter 14-40 VT Level x
Parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation x
Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter x x x
Parameter 14-51 DC-Link Voltage Compensation x x x
Parameter 14-55 Output Filter x x x
Parameter 14-64 Dead Time Compensation Zero Current Level x x x
Parameter 14-65 Speed Derate Dead Time Compensation x x x
Parameter 30-22 Locked Rotor Protection x x
Parameter 30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s] x x

Table 4.2 Active Parameters

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 35

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1-10 Motor Construction 4.2.3 1-2* Motor Data

Option: Function:
[0] * Asynchron For asynchronous motors.
This parameter group comprises input data from the
nameplate on the connected motor.
[1] PM, non For permanent magnet (PM) motors with
salient SPM surface-mounted (non-salient) magnets.
Refer to parameter 1-14 Damping Gain to
NOTICE
parameter 1-17 Voltage filter time const. for Changing the value of these parameters affects the
details about optimizing the motor setting of other parameters.
4 4 operation.

[3] PM, salient For permanent magnet (PM) motors with 1-20 Motor Power
IPM interior (salient) magnets. Option: Function:
[2] 0.12 kW - 0.16 hp
1-14 Damping Gain [3] 0.18 kW - 0.25 hp
Range: Function: [4] 0.25 kW - 0.33 hp
120 [0 - The damping gain stabilizes the PM machine. [5] 0.37 kW - 0.5 hp
%* 250 %] The value of damping gain controls the dynamic [6] 0.55 kW - 0.75 hp
performance of the PM machine. High damping [7] 0.75 kW - 1 hp
gain gives high dynamic performance, and low [8] 1.1 kW - 1.5 hp
damping gain gives low dynamic performance. [9] 1.5 kW - 2 hp
The dynamic performance is related to the [10] 2.2 kW - 3 hp
machine data and load type. If the damping gain [11] 3 kW - 4 hp
is too high or low, the control becomes unstable. [12] 3.7 kW - 5 hp
[13] 4 kW - 5.4 hp
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.
[14] 5.5 kW - 7.5 hp
Range: Function: [15] 7.5 kW - 10 hp
Size related* [ 0.01 - 20 This time constant is used below [16] 11 kW - 15 hp
s] 10% rated speed. Obtain quick [17] 15 kW - 20 hp
control through a short damping [18] 18.5 kW - 25 hp
time constant. However, if this value [19] 22 kW - 30 hp
is too short, the control becomes
[20] 30 kW - 40 hp
unstable.
[21] 37 kW - 50 hp
[22] 45 kW - 60 hp
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.
[23] 55 kW - 75 hp
Range: Function:
[24] 75 kW - 100 hp
Size related* [ 0.01 - 20 This time constant is used above [25] 90 kW - 120 hp
s] 10% rated speed. Obtain quick
control through a short damping 1-22 Motor Voltage
time constant. However, if this value Range: Function:
is too short, the control becomes
Size [50 - 1000 Enter the nominal motor voltage
unstable.
related* V] according to the motor nameplate
data. The default value corresponds to
1-17 Voltage filter time const. the nominal rated output of the unit.
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.001 - 1 Reduces the influence of high
related* s] frequency ripple and system
resonance in the calculation of supply
voltage. Without this filter, the ripples
in the currents can distort the
calculated voltage and affect the
stability of the system.

36 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-23 Motor Frequency 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaption (AMA)

Range: Function: Option: Function:
NOTICE NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted Terminal 27 digital input
while the motor is running. (parameter 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input)
has coast inverse as the default setting.
Size [ 20 - Select the motor frequency value from the This setting means that AMA cannot be
performed if terminal 27 is switched off.
4 4
related* 500 motor nameplate. For 87 Hz operation with
Hz] 230/440 V motors, set the value according to
the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt The AMA function optimizes dynamic motor
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] and performance by automatically optimizing the
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference to the 87 advanced motor parameters.
Hz application. [0] Off No function.
*
1-24 Motor Current
[1] Enable Depending on the option selected in
Range: Function: Complete parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, the AMA is
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the nominal motor current AMA performed on different parameters.
related* 1000.00 A] value from the motor nameplate
• If [0] Asynchron is selected, the AMA is
data. This data is used for calculating performed on:
motor torque, motor thermal
- Parameter 1-30 Stator
protection, and so on.
Resistance (Rs).

1-25 Motor Nominal Speed - Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance

Range: Function: (Rr).

Size related* [50 - 60000 Enter the nominal motor speed - Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage
RPM] value from the motor nameplate Reactance (X1).
data. This data is used for - Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance
calculating automatic motor (Xh).
compensations.
• If [1] PM, non-salient SPM is selected,
the AMA is performed on:
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
Range: Function: - Parameter 1-30 Stator
Resistance (Rs).
Size [0.1 - Enter the value from the motor
related* 10000.0 nameplate data. The default value - Parameter 1-37 d-axis
Nm] corresponds to the nominal rated output. Inductance (Ld).
This parameter is available when • If [3] PM, salient IPM is selected, the
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set AMA is performed on:
to [1] PM, non salient SPM or [3] PM,
- Parameter 1-30 Stator
salient IPM, that is, the parameter is valid
Resistance (Rs).
for PM, non-salient SPM and PM, salient
IPM motors only. - Parameter 1-37 d-axis
Inductance (Ld).
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaption (AMA) - Parameter 1-38 q-axis
Option: Function: Inductance (Lq).

NOTICE - Parameter 1-44 d-axis

This parameter cannot be adjusted while Inductance Sat. (LdSat).
the motor is running. - Parameter 1-45 q-axis
Inductance Sat. (LqSat).

[2] Enable Perform a reduced AMA of the stator resistance

Reduced Rs (parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)) in the
AMA system only. If an LC filter is used between the
frequency converter and the motor, select this
option. (This option is only for asynchronous
motors.)

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 37

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to options 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
that enable permanent motor mode, the only option Range: Function:
available is [1] Enable Complete AMA.
motor. The default setting is calculated
by the frequency converter from the
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand On] after motor nameplate data.
selecting [1] Enable Complete AMA or [2] Enable Reduced
AMA. After a normal sequence, the display reads: Press [OK] 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
to finish AMA. After pressing [OK], the frequency converter
Range: Function:
4 4
is ready for operation.
Size [ 0.0 - NOTICE
related* 9999.000
NOTICE Ohm]
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
• For the best adaptation of the frequency running.
converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
• AMA cannot be performed while the motor is Set the stator leakage reactance
running. value. Obtain the value from a motor
datasheet or perform an AMA on a
cold motor. The default setting is
NOTICE calculated by the frequency converter
Avoid generating external torque during AMA. from the motor nameplate data.

If an LC filter is used, set the frequency converter to run in 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
U/f control mode (recommended), or perform reduced Range: Function:
AMA in VVC+ mode. If an LC filter is not used, perform Size [ 0.0 - NOTICE
complete AMA. related* 9999.00
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Ohm]
while the motor is running.
4.2.4 1-3* Adv. Motor Data I
Set the main reactance of the motor using
Set parameters for advanced motor data. The motor data 1 of these methods:
in parameters 1-30 to 1-39 must match the motor for
• Run an AMA on a cold motor.
optimal performance. If the motor data is not known, The frequency converter
running an AMA is recommended. measures the value from the
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) motor.

Range: Function: • Enter the Xh value manually.

Size [ 0.0 - NOTICE Obtain the value from the motor
supplier.
related* 9999.000
This parameter cannot be
Ohm]
adjusted while the motor is • Use the Xh default setting. The
running. frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.
Set the stator resistance value. Enter
the value from a motor datasheet
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
or perform an AMA on a cold
motor. Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - 65535 NOTICE
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) related* mH]
This parameter cannot be
Range: Function: adjusted while the motor is
Size [0 - NOTICE running.
related* 9999.000
This parameter cannot be
Ohm] Enter the value of the d-axis
adjusted while the motor is
running. inductance. Obtain the value from the
permanent magnet motor datasheet
or perform an AMA on a cold motor.
Enter the rotor resistance value. Obtain
the value from a motor datasheet or
by performing an AMA on a cold

38 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) 1-42 Motor Cable Length

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [ 0.000 - NOTICE 50 m* [0 - 100 m] Set the motor cable length in meters.
related* 65535 mH]
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is 1-43 Motor Cable Length Feet
running. Range: Function:
164 ft* [0 - 328 ft] Set the motor cable length. The length unit
Set the value of the q-axis is foot.
inductance. Find the value in the
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)
4 4
motor datasheet or perform an AMA
on a cold motor. Range: Function:
Size [0 - This parameter is active only when
1-39 Motor Poles related 65535 parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to
Range: Function: mH] [3] PM, salient IPM.
Size [2 - NOTICE This parameter corresponds to the saturation
related* 100 ] inductance of d-axis. The default value is the
This parameter cannot be adjusted
value set in parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance
while the motor is running.
(Ld). In most cases, do not change the
default value. If the motor supplier provides
Enter the number of motor poles.
the saturation curve, enter the d-axis
The motor pole value is always an even inductance value, which is under 100% of
number, because it refers to the total pole the nominal current or perform an AMA on a
numbers, not pairs of poles. cold motor.

1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)

4.2.5 1-4* Adv. Motor Data II
Range: Function:
Set parameters for advanced motor data. Size [0 - This parameter is active only when
related* 65535 parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM mH] [3] PM, salient IPM.
Range: Function: This parameter corresponds to the q-axis
Size [1 - Set the nominal back EMF for the motor saturation inductance. The default value is
related* 9000 V] when running at 1000 RPM. the value set in parameter 1-38 q-axis
Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM Inductance (Lq). In most cases, do not
motor when no frequency converter is change the default value. If the motor
connected and the shaft is turned supplier provides the saturation curve, enter
externally. Back EMF is normally specified the q-axis inductance value, which is under
for nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM 100% of the nominal current or perform an
measured between 2 lines. If the value is AMA on a cold motor.
not available for a motor speed of 1000
RPM, calculate the correct value as follows: 1-46 Position Detection Gain
If back EMF is, for example, 320 V at 1800 Range: Function:
RPM, it can be calculated at 1000 RPM: 100 %* [ 20 - Adjust the amplitude of the test pulse
Example 200 %] during position detection at start. Adjust
Back EMF 320 V at 1800 RPM. Back EMF = this parameter to improve the position
(Voltage/RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 = measurement.
178.

This parameter is only active when 1-48 Current at Min Inductance for d-axis
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to Range: Function:
options that enable PM (permanent 100 % [ 20 - 200 %] Use this parameter to set the inductance
magnet) motors. saturation point.

NOTICE
When using PM motors, it is
recommended to use brake resistors.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 39

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1-49 Current at Min Inductance for q-axis 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F

Range: Function: Range: Function:
100 % [ 20 - This parameter specifies the saturation curve of Size [0 - Enter frequency points to form a U/f charac-
200 %] the q-inductance values. From 20–100% of this related* 500.0 teristic which matches the motor. Voltage at
parameter, the inductance is linearly Hz] each point is defined in parameter 1-55 U/f
approximated due to parameter 1-38 q-axis Characteristic - U.
Inductance (Lq) and parameter 1-45 q-axis
Make a U/f characteristic based on 6
Inductance Sat. (LqSat). These parameters are
definable voltages and frequencies, see
4 4 related to the motor nameplate load compen-
sations, the application load type, and the
Illustration 4.3.
Motor Voltage

130BA166.10
electronic brake function for quick stop/hold of Par 1-55 [x]

the motor. 1-55[5]

1-55[4]

1-55[3]

4.2.6 1-5* Load Indep. Setting 1-55[2]

1-55[1]
1-55[0]

1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56

[5]
Parameters for load-independent motor settings.
[0] [1] [2] [3] [4]

Output Frequency
Par 1-56 [x]

1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed Illustration 4.3 Example of U/f Charac-
Range: Function: teristic
100 [0 - Use this parameter along with parameter 1-52 Min
%* 300 % Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] to obtain a
] different thermal load on the motor when running
at low speed. 4.2.7 1-6* Load Depen. Setting
Enter a value that is a percentage of the rated
magnetizing current. If the setting is too low, the Parameters for adjusting the load-dependent motor
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced. settings.
Magn. current
130BB780.10

1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation

90% Range: Function:
Par.1-50
100 %* [0 - Enter the low-speed voltage compensation
Par.1-52 Hz 300 %] value in percent. This parameter is used for
optimizing the low-speed load performance.
Illustration 4.2 Motor Magnetization
This parameter is only active if
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [0]
Asynchron.
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
1 Hz* [ 0.1 - 10.0 Set the required frequency for normal
Hz] magnetizing current. Use this parameter 100 %* [0 - Enter the high-speed load voltage compen-
along with parameter 1-50 Motor Magneti- 300 %] sation value in percent. This parameter is
sation at Zero Speed, also see Illustration 4.2. used for optimizing the high-speed load
performance. This parameter is only active if
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U parameter 1-10 Motor Construction = [0]
Asynchron.
Range: Function:
Size [0 - 1000 Enter voltage at each frequency point
1-62 Slip Compensation
related* V] to manually form a U/f characteristic
Range: Function:
which matches the motor. Frequency
points are defined in Size [ -400 - Enter the % value for slip compensation
parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F. related* 400.0 %] to compensate for tolerance in the
value of nM,N. Slip compensation is
calculated automatically, that is, based
on the nominal motor speed nM,N.

40 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant 4.2.8 1-7* Start Adjustments

Range: Function:
0.1 s* [0.05 - 5 s] Enter the slip compensation reaction speed.
Parameters for adjusting the motor start settings.
A high value results in slow reaction, and a 1-70 Start Mode
low value results in quick reaction. If low-
Select the PM motor start-up mode. To initialize the VVC+ control
frequency resonance problems occur, use a
core for previously free-running PM motor. Active for PM motors
longer time setting.
in VVC+ only if the motor is stopped (or running at low speed).

1-64 Resonance Dampening

Range: Function:
Option:
[0] * Rotor
Function:
Estimates the electrical angle of the rotor
4 4
Detection and uses this angle as a starting point.
100 [0 - Enter the resonance dampening value. Set
This option is the standard selection for
%* 500 %] parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
industrial applications. If flystart detects
parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
that the motor runs at low speed or has
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
stopped, the frequency converter detects
resonance problems. To reduce resonance
the rotor position (the angle) and starts
oscillation, increase the value of
the motor from that position.
parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening.
[1] Parking The parking function applies DC current
1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant across the stator winding and rotates the
Range: Function: rotor to electrical 0 position. This option is
typically for pump and fan applications. If
0.005 s* [ 0.001 - Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening
flystart detects that the motor runs at low
0.05 s] and parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening
speed or has stopped, the frequency
Time Constant to help eliminate high-
converter sends out a DC current to make
frequency resonance problems. Enter the
the motor park at an angle and then starts
time constant that provides the best
the motor from that position.
dampening.
[3] Rotor Last This option takes the advantage of the last
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed Position position of rotor at stop and gives a quick
Range: Function: start. It is only used in the situation of
controlled stop, the frequency converter
50 %* [0 - Enter the minimum motor current at low
records the last position of rotor at stop
120 %] speed. Increasing this current improves
and starts the motor directly without rotor
motor torque at low speed.
detection and angle calculation. When in
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
the situation of non-controlled stop and
enabled only for PM motor.
power cycle, the frequency converter
needs to detect the rotor position.

This option can be used for fast restart

application. Start may fail if the rotor
position has been changed.

1-71 Start Delay

Range: Function:
0 s* [0.0 - This parameter enables a delay of the starting
10.0 s] time. The frequency converter begins with the
start function selected in parameter 1-72 Start
Function. Set the start delay time until
acceleration is to begin.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 41

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1-72 Start Function 1-73 Flying Start

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Select the start function during start delay. [2] Enabled Enable flying start at every start command.
This parameter is linked to parameter 1-71 Start Always
Delay. [3] Enabled Enable the frequency converter to catch and
[0] DC Hold/ Energizes motor with a DC hold current Ref. Dir. control a spinning motor. The search is
delay time (parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Motor Preheat Current) performed only in the reference direction.
during the start delay time. [4] Enab. Enable flying start at every start command. The
4 4 [2] Coast/delay Motor coasted during the start delay time Always Ref. search is performed only in the reference
* time (inverter off). Dir. direction.

[3] Start speed Only possible with VVC+. Regardless of the 1-75 Start Speed [Hz]
cw value applied by the reference signal, the
Range: Function:
output speed applies the setting of the start
Size [0 - This parameter can be used for hoist
speed in parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] and
related* 500.0 applications (cone rotor). Set a motor start
the output current corresponds to the setting
Hz] speed. After the start signal, the output
of the start current in parameter 1-76 Start
speed leaps to the set value. Set the start
Current. This function is typically used in
function in parameter 1-72 Start Function to
hoisting applications without counterweight
[3] Start speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation, or
and especially in applications with a Cone-
[5] VVC+ clockwise, and set a start delay time
motor, where the start is clockwise, followed
in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
by rotation in the reference direction.

[4] Horizontal Only possible with VVC+. 1-76 Start Current

operation For obtaining the function described in
Range: Function:
parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] and
Size [0 - Some motors, for example cone rotor
parameter 1-76 Start Current during the start
related* 1000 A] motors, need extra current/starting speed to
delay time. The motor rotates in the reference
disengage the rotor. To obtain this boost, set
direction. If the reference signal equals zero (0),
the required current in this parameter. Set
parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] is ignored and
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start
the output speed equals zero (0). The output
speed cw or [4] Horizontal operation, and set
current corresponds to the setting of the start
a start delay time in parameter 1-71 Start
current in parameter 1-76 Start Current.
Delay.
[5] VVC+ The start speed is calculated automatically. This
clockwise function uses the start speed in the start delay 1-78 Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz]
time only.
Range: Function:
0 Hz* [0 - This parameter enables high starting torque. This
1-73 Flying Start
500 Hz] function ignores current limit and torque limit
Option: Function: during start of the motor. The time from the start
NOTICE signal is given until the speed exceeds the speed
To obtain the best flying start set in this parameter becomes a start zone. In
performance, the advanced motor data, the start zone, the current limit and motoric
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to torque limit are set to the maximum possible
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh), value for the frequency converter/motor
must be correct. combination. The time without protection from
the current limit and torque limit must not
Catch a motor which is spinning freely due to exceed the value set in
a mains dropout. parameter 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip.
Otherwise, the frequency converter trips with
[0] Disabled No function. alarm 18, Start Failed.
*
[1] Enabled Enable the frequency converter to catch and 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip
control a spinning motor. When
Range: Function:
parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,
5 s* [0 - The time from the start signal is given until the
parameter 1-71 Start Delay, and
10 s] speed exceeds the speed set in
parameter 1-72 Start Function have no function.
parameter 1-78 Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz]

42 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip 1-80 Function at Stop

Range: Function: Option: Function:
must not exceed the time set in this parameter. Solution 2:
Otherwise, the frequency converter trips with alarm 1. Set parameter 1-71 Start Delay to the
18, Start Failed. Any time set in parameter 1-71 Start premagnetize time (2–4 rotor time
Delay for use of a start function must be executed constants).
within the time limit. 2. Set parameter 1-72 Start Function to
[0] DC hold.
4.2.9 1-8* Stop Adjustments 3. Set the DC-hold current magnitude 4 4
(parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Motor
Parameters for adjusting motor stop settings. Preheat Current to be equal to Ipre-mag
= Unom/(1.73 x Xh).
1-80 Function at Stop
Sample rotor time constants =
Option: Function:
(Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr)
Select the frequency converter function after
1 kW = 0.2 s
a stop command or after the speed is ramped
10 kW = 0.5 s
down to the settings in parameter 1-82 Min
100 kW = 1.7 s
Speed for Function at Stop [Hz].

Available selections depend on the setting in 1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction. Range: Function:
• [0] Asynchron. 0 Hz* [0 - 20 Hz] Set the output frequency at which to
- [0] Coast. activate parameter 1-80 Function at Stop.

- [1] DC hold / Motor Preheat.

1-88 AC Brake Gain
- [3] Pre-magnetizing. Range: Function:
• [1] PM, non salient SPM. 1.4* [1.0 - This parameter is used to set AC brake power
• [3] PM, salient IPM. 2.0 ] capability (set ramp-down time when inertia is
constant). In cases where the DC-link voltage is
- [0] Coast.
not higher than DC-link voltage trip value, the
- [1] DC hold / Motor Preheat. generator torque can be adjusted with this
[0] Coast Leaves the motor in free mode. parameter. The higher AC brake gain is, the
* stronger the brake capability is. Select 1.0 means
that there is no AC brake capability.
[1] DC hold / Energizes the motor with a DC hold current
Motor (see parameter 2-00 DC Hold/Motor Preheat NOTICE
Preheat Current.
If there is continuous generator torque,
[3] Pre- Builds up a magnetic field while the motor is higher generator torque causes higher
magnetizing stopped. This allows the motor to produce motor current, and the motor becomes hot.
torque quickly at commands (asynchronous In this condition, parameter 2-16 AC Brake,
motors only). This premagnetizing function Max current can be used to protect the
does not help the very first start command. motor from overheating.
Two different solutions are available to pre-
magnetize the machine for the first start
command:
4.2.10 1-9* Motor Temperature
Solution 1:
1. Start the frequency converter with a Parameters for adjusting temperature protection settings
0 RPM reference. for the motor.
2. Wait 2 to 4 rotor time constants (see
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
the equation below) before
Option: Function:
increasing the speed reference.
[0] * No Continuously overloaded motor, when no
protection warning or trip of the frequency converter is
required.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 43

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection Using a digital input and 10 V as supply:

Option: Function: Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
[1] Thermistor Activates a warning when the connected
Parameter set-up:
warning thermistor in the motor reacts to a motor
overtemperature.
• Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Thermistor Trip.
[2] Thermistor Stops (trips) the frequency converter when
trip the connected thermistor in the motor reacts
• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital
Input 33.
to a motor overtemperature.
4 4

130BF960.10
The thermistor cutout value must be >3 kΩ.

+10 V
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the 42 53 54 50 55
motor for winding protection.

[3] ETR warning Calculates the load and activates a warning in

OFF
1 the display when the motor is overloaded.
37 38 12 13 18 19 27 29 31 32 33
Program a warning signal via 1 of the digital
outputs.

[4] ETR trip 1 Calculates the load and stops (trips) the
ON
frequency converter when the motor is
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.9 kΩ R
overloaded. Program a warning signal via 1 of
the digital outputs. The signal appears in the Illustration 4.5 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input
event of a warning and if the frequency
converter trips (thermal warning). Once the
MOTOR ETR OVER alarm is reported, it can Using an analog input and 10 V as supply:
reset immediately. Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
[22] ETR Trip - Calculates the load and stops (trips) the temperature is too high.
Extended frequency converter when the motor is Parameter set-up:
Detection overloaded. Program a warning signal via 1 of • Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
the digital outputs. The signal appears in the Thermistor Trip.
event of a warning and if the frequency
• Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog
converter trips (thermal warning). Once the Input 54.
MOTOR ETR OVER alarm is reported, it can
only reset after parameter 16-18 Motor

130BF694.10
+10 V

Thermal decreases to 0.
42 53 54 50 55
R OFF
175HA183.11

(Ω)

4000 ON
PTC / Thermistor <800 Ω >2.9 kΩ R
3000
Illustration 4.6 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input
1330

550 Input Supply voltage Threshold

digital/analog cutout values
250 Digital 10 V <800 Ω - 2.9 kΩ
Analog 10 V <800 Ω - 2.9 kΩ

Table 4.3 Threshold Cutout Values

 [°C]

-20 °C  nominal -5 °C
 nominal
 nominal +5 °C NOTICE
Check that the selected supply voltage follows the
Illustration 4.4 PTC Profile
specification of the used thermistor element.

44 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

1-93 Thermistor Source 2-01 DC Brake Current

Option: Function: Range: Function:
NOTICE 50 [0 - NOTICE
%* 150 %
This parameter cannot be changed MOTOR OVERHEATING
]
while the motor is running. The maximum value depends on the rated
motor current.
NOTICE To avoid motor damage caused by
overheating, do not run at 100% for too
Digital input should be set to [0] PNP
- Active at 24 V in long. 4 4
parameter 5-00 Digital Input Mode.
Set current as % of rated motor current,
parameter 1-24 Motor Current. When speed is
Select the input to which the thermistor
below the limit set in parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut
(PTC sensor) should be connected. If an
In Speed, or when the DC-brake inverse function is
analog input in this parameter is set as a
active (in parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs set to
source, it cannot be used for an other
[5] DC-brake inverse; or via the serial port), a DC-
purpose, for example, reference, feedback.
brake current is applied on a stop command. See
[0] * None parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time for duration.
[1] Analog Input
53 2-02 DC Braking Time
[2] Analog Input
Range: Function:
54
10 s* [0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC brake current set in
[3] Digital input
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current, once
18
activated.
[4] Digital input
19
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed
[5] Digital input
Range: Function:
32
[6] Digital input 0 Hz* [ 0 - 500 This parameter is for setting the DC brake
33 Hz] cut-in speed at which the DC brake current
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current is to be
[7] Digital input
active, with a stop command.
31

4.3 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 2-06 Parking Current

Range: Function:
4.3.1 2-0* DC Brake
100 %* [0 - 150 %] Set current as percentage of rated motor
current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
Use this parameter group to configure DC brake and DC
hold functions. 2-07 Parking Time
2-00 DC Hold/Motor Preheat Current Range: Function:
Range: Function: 3 s* [0.1 - 60 s] Set the duration of the parking current set in
50 % [0 - Set the holding current as a percentage of the parameter 2-06 Parking Current, once activated.
* 160 %] rated motor current IM,N parameter 1-24 Motor
Current. This parameter holds the motor function
4.3.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
(holding torque) or pre-heats the motor. This
parameter is active if [0] DC hold is selected in
Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking parameters.
parameter 1-72 Start Function, or if [1] DC hold/pre-
Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper.
heat is selected in parameter 1-80 Function at
Stop. 2-10 Brake Function
NOTICE Option: Function:
The maximum value depends on the rated [0] Off No brake resistor is installed.
motor current. Avoid 100% current for too *
long. It may damage the motor. [1] Resistor A brake resistor is incorporated in the system for
brake dissipating surplus brake energy as heat.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 45

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

2-10 Brake Function 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Option: Function: Range: Function:
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC- NOTICE
link voltage during braking (generating
If Rbr is not known or if Tbr is different
operation). The brake resistor function is only
from 120 s, the practical approach is
active in frequency converters with an integral
to run the brake application, read out
dynamic brake.
parameter 16-33 Brake Energy Average,
[2] AC brake Improve braking without using a brake resistor. and then enter this value + 20% in
4 4 This parameter controls an overmagnetization of
the motor when running with a generatoric load.
parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit
(kW).
This function can improve the OVC function.
Increasing the electrical losses in the motor
allows the OVC function to increase braking 2-14 Brake voltage reduce
torque without exceeding the voltage limit. Range: Function:

NOTICE 0 V* [ 0 - 71 V] Setting this parameter may change the brake

resistor (parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)).
The AC brake is not as efficient as
dynamic braking with resistor. 2-16 AC Brake, Max current
AC brake is for VVC+ mode in both open Range: Function:
and closed loop.
100 %* [0 - Enter the maximum allowed current when
160 %] using AC brake to avoid overheating of
motor windings.
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)
Range: Function: NOTICE
Size [0 - Set the brake resistor value in Ω. This Parameter 2-16 AC Brake, Max current
related* 6200 value is used for monitoring the power to is only available for asynchronous
Ohm] the brake resistor. Parameter 2-11 Brake motors.
Resistor (ohm) is only active in frequency
converters with an integral dynamic brake.
Use this parameter for values without 2-17 Over-voltage Control
decimals. Option: Function:
Overvoltage control (OVC) reduces the risk of
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) the frequency converter tripping due to an
Range: Function: overvoltage on the DC link caused by
Size [0.001 - Parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) is the generative power from the load.
related* 2000 expected average power dissipated in the [0] * Disabled No OVC required.
kW] brake resistor over a period of 120 s. It is
[1] Enabled Activate OVC except when using a stop signal
used as the monitoring limit for
(not at to stop the frequency converter.
parameter 16-33 Brake Energy Average and
stop)
specifies when a warning/alarm is given.
[2] Enabled Activate OVC.
To calculate parameter 2-12 Brake Power
Limit (kW), the following formula can be
used.
CAUTION
U 2br V × t br s PERSONAL INJURY AND
Pbr, avg W =
Rbr Ω × T br s
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Pbr,avg is the average power dissipated in Enabling OVC in hoisting applications
the brake resistor. Rbr is the resistance of may lead to personal injuries and
the brake resistor. tbr is the active breaking equipment damage.
time within the 120 s period Tbr.
Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake • DO NOT enable OVC in hoisting
resistor is active. For T4 units, the DC applications.
voltage is 770 V, which can be reduced by
parameter 2-14 Brake voltage reduce.
2-19 Over-voltage Gain
Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 200 %] Select overvoltage gain.

46 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.3.3 2-2* Mechanical Brake 2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time
Range: Function:
2-20 Release Brake Current 10.0 ms* [0.1 - 100.0 It is the speed control low-pass filter
Range: Function: ms] during the time set in
0 A* [0 - 100 Set the motor current for release of the parameter 2-25 Brake Release Time.
A] mechanical brake when a start condition is
present. The upper limit is specified in 2-39 Mech. Brake w/ dir. Change
parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current. Enable or disable the mechanical brake function when the shaft

NOTICE changes direction.

4 4
Option: Function:
When mechanical brake control output is
selected, but no mechanical brake is [0] * OFF
connected, the function does not work by [1] ON
default setting due to too low motor [2] ON with start delay The start delay time is set in
current. parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

4.4 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps

2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]
Range: Function: 4.4.1 3-0* Reference Limits
0 Hz* [0 - 400 Hz] Set the motor frequency for activation of
Parameters for setting the reference unit, limits, and
the mechanical brake when a stop
ranges.
condition is present.
3-00 Reference Range
2-23 Activate Brake Delay Option: Function:
Range: Function: [0] * Min - Max Select the range of the reference signal and
0 s* [0 - 5 s] Enter the brake delay time of the coast after the feedback signal. Signal values can be
ramp-down time. The shaft is held at 0 speed positive only, or positive and negative.
with full holding torque. Ensure that the
[1] -Max - For both positive and negative values (both
mechanical brake has locked the load before the
+Max directions), relative to parameter 4-10 Motor
motor enters coast mode.
Speed Direction.

2-24 Stop Delay

3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
0 s* [0 - 5 s] It is used to define a time, during which the
[0] None
speed close loop controls the motor to run at 0
[1] %
RPM, after that the brake is activated.
[2] RPM

2-25 Brake Release Time [3] Hz

[4] Nm
Range: Function:
[5] PPM
0 s* [0 - 5 s] It reserves a time before ramping up after
[10] 1/min
opening the brake, and the speed close loop
[12] Pulse/s
control controls the speed at 0 RPM.
[20] l/s

2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain [21] l/min

[22] l/h
Range: Function:
[23] m³/s
0.015* [0.000 - It is the speed controller proportional
[24] m³/min
1.000 ] gain during the time set in
[25] m³/h
parameter 2-25 Brake Release Time.
[30] kg/s

2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time [31] kg/min

[32] kg/h
Range: Function:
[33] t/min
200.0 ms* [1.0 - 20000.0 It is the speed controller integral
[34] t/h
ms] time during the time set in
[40] m/s
parameter 2-25 Brake Release Time.
[41] m/min

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 47

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit 3-03 Maximum Reference

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[45] m Size [-4999.0 - 4999 Enter the maximum reference. The
[60] °C related* ReferenceFeed- maximum reference is the highest
[70] mbar backUnit] value obtainable by summing all
[71] bar references.
[72] Pa The maximum reference unit
[73] kPa matches:
4 4 [74] m WG • The option selected in
parameter 1-00 Configuration
[80] kW
[120] GPM Mode.
[121] gal/s • The unit selected in
[122] gal/min parameter 3-00 Reference
[123] gal/h Range.
[124] CFM
[125] ft³/s 3-04 Reference Function
[126] ft³/min Option: Function:
[127] ft³/h [0] * Sum Sum both external and preset reference
[130] lb/s sources.
[131] lb/min
[1] External/ Use either the preset or the external
[132] lb/h
Preset reference source. Shift between external and
[140] ft/s preset via a command or a digital input.
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
[150] lb ft 4.4.2 3-1* References
[160] °F
[170] psi 3-10 Preset Reference
[171] lb/in2 Range: Function:
[172] in WG 0 %* [-100 - Enter up to 8 different preset references (0–7)
[173] ft WG 100 %] in this parameter, using array programming. For
[180] HP selecting dedicated references, select preset
reference bit 0/1/2 [16], [17], or [18] for the
3-02 Minimum Reference
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
Range: Function: 5-1* Digital Inputs.
0 Reference- [ -4999.0 - Enter the minimum reference. The
FeedbackUnit* 4999 minimum reference is the lowest 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all Range: Function:
backUnit] references.
5 Hz* [0 - The jog speed is a fixed output speed at which
The minimum reference is active
500.0 Hz] the frequency converter runs when the jog
only when
function is activated. See also
parameter 3-00 Reference Range is
parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
set to [0] Min.–Max.
The jog speed must not exceed the setting in
The minimum reference unit
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
matches:
• The option in 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value
parameter 1-00 Configu-
Range: Function:
ration Mode.
0 %* [0 - Enter a percentage value to be either added to or
• The unit selected in
100 %] deducted from the actual reference for catching
parameter 3-01 Reference/
up or slowing down respectively. If [28] Catch up is
Feedback Unit.
selected via 1 of the digital inputs
(parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to
parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input), the
percentage value is added to the total reference. If
[29] Slow down is selected via 1 of the digital

48 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 3-15 Reference 1 Source

Range: Function: Option: Function:
inputs (parameter 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to up to 3 different reference signals. The
parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input), the sum of these reference signals defines
percentage value is deducted from the total the actual reference.
reference.
[0] No function
[1] * Analog Input 53
3-13 Reference Site
[2] Analog Input 54
Select which reference site to activate.
[7] Frequency input 4 4
Option: Function: 29
[0] * Linked to Hand / Use the local reference in hand mode [8] Frequency input
Auto or the remote reference in auto mode. 33

[1] Remote Use the reference in hand mode. [11] Local bus
reference
[2] Local Use the reference in auto mode.
[20] Digital pot.meter
[32] Bus PCD
3-14 Preset Relative Reference
Range: Function: 3-16 Reference 2 Source
0 %* [-100 - The actual reference, X, is increased or decreased Option: Function:
100 %] with the percentage Y, set in Select the reference input to be used
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference. This for the second reference signal.
results in the actual reference Z. Actual reference Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
(X) is the sum of the inputs selected in parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source, and
parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source, parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source define
parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source, up to 3 different reference signals. The
parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source, and sum of these reference signals defines
parameter 8-02 Control Source. the actual reference.

[0] No function
130BA059.12

Y
Relative Z Resulting [1] Analog Input 53
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference [2] * Analog Input 54
[7] Frequency input
Illustration 4.7 Preset Relative Reference 29
[8] Frequency input
33
[11] Local bus
130BA278.10

Z
reference
0
*Y /10
X+X [20] Digital pot.meter
[32] Bus PCD
X
3-17 Reference 3 Source
Option: Function:
Select the reference input to be used
Y
for the third reference signal.
-100 0 100 %
Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source,
P 3-14
parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source, and
Illustration 4.8 Actual Reference
parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source
define up to 3 different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
3-15 Reference 1 Source signals defines the actual reference.
Option: Function: [0] No function
Select the reference input to be used [1] Analog Input 53
for the first reference signal. [2] Analog Input 54
Parameter 3-15 Reference 1 Source, [7] Frequency input
parameter 3-16 Reference 2 Source, and 29
parameter 3-17 Reference 3 Source define

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 49

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

3-17 Reference 3 Source 4.4.3 3-4* Ramp 1

Option: Function:
[8] Frequency input
Configure the ramp parameter, ramping times, for each of
33
the 4 ramps (parameter group 3-4* Ramp 1, parameter
group 3-5* Ramp 2, parameter group 3-6* Ramp 3, and
[11] * Local bus
parameter group 3-7* Ramp 4).
reference
[20] Digital pot.meter

130BD379.10
Hz
[32] Bus PCD

4 4 3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource

P 4-14
High-limit
Reference
Option: Function: P 1-23
Motor
NOTICE
frequency
P 4-12
Low limit
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
P 3-*2 Time
P 3-*1 Ramp (X)
Select a variable value to be added to the Ramp (X)Up Down
Time (Acc) Time (Dec)
fixed value (defined in
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference). tacc tdec
The sum of the fixed and variable values Illustration 4.10 Example of Ramp 1
(labeled Y in Illustration 4.9) is multiplied
by the actual reference (labeled X in
Illustration 4.9). This product is then
3-40 Ramp 1 Type
added to the actual reference (X+X*Y/100)
to give the resulting actual reference. Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
130BA059.12

Y requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A

Relative Z Resulting
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
ramping. A sine 2 ramp gives non-linear
Illustration 4.9 Resulting Actual acceleration.
Reference [0] * Linear
[2] Sine 2 (Only to be used with speed control mode.) S-
Ramp ramp based on the values set in
[0] * No function parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time and
[1] Analog Input 53 parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
[2] Analog Input 54
[7] Frequency input 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
29 Range: Function:
[8] Frequency input Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, that is the
33 related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 Hz to the
[11] Local bus synchronous motor speed nS
reference parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency or from 0
NM to the nominal torque if torque configu-
ration modes are selected. It is applicable
for Ramp 1 to Ramp 4. Select a ramp-up
time such that the output current does not
exceed the current limit in
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during ramping.
See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.
t acc  s  x ns  Hz
Par .  3 − 41  =  
 ref   Hz

50 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is the generated current does not exceed the
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the synchronous current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current
motor speed ns to 0 Hz or from the Limit. See ramp-up time in
nominal torque to 0 NM if the torque parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time.
configuration modes are selected. Select a t dec  s  x ns  Hz
Par .  3 − 52  =  
ramp-down time such that no overvoltage  ref   Hz

occurs in the inverter due to regenerative

operation of the motor, and such that the 4.4.5 3-6* Ramp 3
4 4
generated current does not exceed the
current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current This parameter group configures ramp 3 parameters.
Limit. See ramp-up time in
parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time. 3-60 Ramp 3 Type
t dec  s  x ns  Hz Option: Function:
Par .  3 − 42  =  
 ref   Hz Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
4.4.4 3-5* Ramp 2 linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
This parameter group configures ramp 2 parameters. acceleration.

3-50 Ramp 2 Type [0] * Linear

[2] Sine 2 S-ramp based on the values set in
Option: Function:
Ramp parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time and
Select the ramp type, depending on
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time.
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time
ramping. A sine 2 ramp gives non-linear
acceleration.
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, which is the
[0] * Linear
related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 Hz to the rated
[2] Sine 2 S-ramp based on the values set in
motor speed ns. Select a ramp-up time
Ramp parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
such that the output current does not
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
exceed the current limit in
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ramping. See ramp-down time in
Range: Function: parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time.
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, which is the
related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 Hz to the rated 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time
motor speed ns. Select a ramp-up time Range: Function:
such that the output current does not
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, which is the
exceed the current limit in
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
speed ns to 0 Hz. Select a ramp-down time
ramping. See ramp-down time in
such that no overvoltage arises in the
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
inverter due to regenerative operation of the
Par .  3 − 51  =  
t acc  s  x ns  Hz motor, and such that the generated current
 ref   Hz
does not exceed the current limit set in
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time parameter 4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up
time in parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up
Range: Function:
Time.
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, that is the
t dec  s  x ns  Hz
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor Par .  3 − 62  =  
 ref   Hz
speed ns to 0 Hz or from the nominal
torque to 0 NM if the torque configuration
modes are selected. Select a ramp-down
time such that no overvoltage arises in the
frequency converter due to regenerative
operation of the motor, and such that the

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 51

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4.4.6 3-7* Ramp 4 4.4.7 3-8* Other Ramps

This parameter group configures ramp 4 parameters. 3-80 Jog Ramp Time
3-70 Ramp 4 Type Range: Function:
Option: Function: Size [0.01 Enter the jog ramp time, which is the
related* - 3600 acceleration/deceleration time between 0 Hz
Select the ramp type, depending on
s] and the rated motor frequency ns. Ensure that
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
the resulting output current required for the

4 4
linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
given jog ramp time does not exceed the
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
acceleration.
The jog ramp time starts when activating a
[0] * Linear jog signal via the LCP, a selected digital
[2] Sine 2 S-ramp based on the values set in output, or the serial communication port.
Ramp parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time and When jog state is disabled, the normal
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time. ramping times are valid.

3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time

130BD375.11
Hz
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, which is the
P 4-14 Hz
related* 3600 s] acceleration time from 0 Hz to the rated High limit
motor speed ns. Select a ramp-up time
P 1-23
such that the output current does not Motor frequency
exceed the current limit in P 3-19
parameter 4-18 Current Limit during Jog speed
ramping. See ramp-down time in P 4-12 Hz
Low limit
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time. t jog t jog Time
t acc  s  x ns  Hz P 3-80 P 3-80
Par .  3 − 71  =  
 ref   Hz Ramp up Ramp down
(acc) (dec)
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time
Illustration 4.11 Jog Ramp Time
Range: Function:
Size [0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, which is the
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor t jog  s  x ns  Hz
Par .  3 − 80  =  
speed ns to 0 Hz. Select a ramp-down time  Δ  jog speed  par .  3  −  19   Hz

such that no overvoltage arises in the 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time
inverter due to regenerative operation of the Range: Function:
motor, and such that the generated current
Size [0.01 - Enter the quick-stop ramp-down time,
does not exceed the current limit set in
related* 3600 s] which is the deceleration time from the
parameter 4-18 Current Limit. See ramp-up
synchronous motor speed to 0 Hz. Ensure
time in parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up
that no resulting overvoltage occurs in the
Time.
inverter due to regenerative operation of
t dec  s  x ns  Hz the motor required to achieve the given
Par .  3 − 72  =  
 ref   Hz
ramp-down time. Ensure also that the
generated current required to achieve the
given ramp-down time does not exceed
the current limit (set in
parameter 4-18 Current Limit). Activate quick
stop with a signal on a selected digital
input, or via the serial communication port.

52 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

3-95 Ramp Delay

130BD376.11
Hz
Range: Function:
1000 [0 - Enter the delay required from activation
P 4-14 Hz
high limit
ms* 3600000 ms] of the digital potentiometer function
until the frequency converter starts to
Reference
ramp the reference. With a delay of 0 ms,
P 1-23
Motor frequency the reference starts to ramp as soon as
increase/decrease is activated.
P 4-12 Hz
low limit
4.5 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 4 4
P 3-81
Time 4.5.1 4-1* Motor Limits
Qramp

Define torque, current, and speed limits for the motor, and
Qstop
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
Illustration 4.12 Quick Stop Ramp Time exceeded.
A limit may generate a message in the display. A warning
always generates a message in the display or on the
4.4.8 3-9* Digital Potentiometer fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a
trip, after which the frequency converter stops and
The digital potentiometer enables increase or decrease of generates an alarm message.
the actual reference by adjusting the set-up of the digital 4-10 Motor Speed Direction
inputs using the functions Increase, Decrease or Clear. To
Option: Function:
activate the function, at least 1 digital input must be set to
Increase or Decrease. [0] Clockwise NOTICE
The setting in parameter 4-10 Motor
3-90 Step Size
Speed Direction has impact on
Range: Function: parameter 1-73 Flying Start.
0.10 % [0.01 - Enter the increment size required for
* 200 %] increase/decrease as a percentage of the Only operation in clockwise direction is
synchronous motor speed, ns. If increase/ allowed.
decrease is activated, the resulting reference
is increased/decreased by the amount set in [2] * Both Operation in both clockwise and counter-
this parameter. directions clockwise directions is allowed.

3-92 Power Restore 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Option: Function: Range: Function:

[0] * Off Reset the digital potentiometer reference to 0% after 0 Hz* [0 - Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. The
power-up. 400.0 Hz] motor speed low limit can be set to
correspond to the minimum output frequency
[1] On Restore the most recent digital potentiometer of the motor shaft.
reference at power-up. The motor speed low limit must not exceed
the setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
3-93 Maximum Limit Limit [Hz].
Range: Function:
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
100 %* [-200 - Set the maximum permissible value for the
200 %] resulting reference. This is recommended if Range: Function:
the digital potentiometer is used for fine- 65 [ 0.1 - NOTICE
tuning of the resulting reference. Hz* 500
Maximum output frequency cannot exceed
Hz]
10% of the inverter switching frequency
3-94 Minimum Limit (parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency).
Range: Function:
-100 % [-200 - Set the minimum permissible value for the Enter the maximum limit for motor speed. The
200 %] resulting reference. This is recommended if motor speed high limit can be set to correspond
the digital potentiometer is used for fine- to the manufacturer’s recommended maximum of
tuning of the resulting reference. the motor shaft.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 53

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] 4.5.2 4-2* Limit Factors
Range: Function:
The motor speed high limit must exceed the 4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source
value in parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit Select an analog input for scaling the settings in
[Hz], and must not exceed the value in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 0–100% (or inverse).
The signal levels corresponding to 0% and 100% are defined in
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode the analog input scaling, for example parameter group 6-1*

4 4 Range:
Size related*
Function:
[ 0 - 1000 %] This function limits the torque on
Analog Input 1. This parameter is only active when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Open Loop or [1]
Speed Closed Loop.
the shaft to protect the mechanical
installation. Option: Function:
[0] * No function
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode [2] Analog in 53
Range: Function: [4] Analog in 53 inv
100 %* [ 0 - 1000 %] This function limits the torque on the [6] Analog in 54
shaft to protect the mechanical instal- [8] Analog in 54 inv
lation. [18] Bus Control

4-18 Current Limit 4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source

Select an analog input for scaling the settings in
Range: Function:
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency 0–100% (or inverse). The
Size [0 - This is a true current limit function that
signal levels corresponding to 0% and 100% are defined in the
related* 1000 %] continues in the oversynchronous range.
analog input scaling, for example parameter group 6-1* Analog
However, due to field weakening, the
Input 1. This parameter is only active when
motor torque at current limit drops
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in torque mode.
accordingly when the voltage increase
stops above the synchronized motor Option: Function:
speed. [0] * No function
[2] Analog in 53
4-19 Max Output Frequency [4] Analog in 53 inv
Range: Function: [6] Analog in 54
Size [0 - NOTICE [8] Analog in 54 inv
related* 500 [18] Bus Control
This parameter cannot be adjusted
Hz]
while the motor is running. 4-22 Break Away Boost
Option: Function:
NOTICE [0] * Off
Maximum output frequency cannot [1] On The frequency converter provides higher current than
exceed 10% of the inverter switching normal current levels to enhance breakaway-torque
frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching capacity.
Frequency).
4-27 Torque Limit Bus Control
Provide a final limit on the output frequency Range: Function:
for improved safety in applications at risk of 0* [0 - This parameter is used to specify the bus factor
overspeeding. This limit is final in all configu- 16384 ] to control the torque limit. It only works when
rations (independent of the setting in parameter 4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source is set
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode). to [18] Bus Control. This parameter is N2 format.

4-28 Speed Limit Bus Control

Range: Function:
0* [0 - This parameter is used to specify the bus factor
16384 ] to control the speed limit. It only works when
parameter 4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source is set
to [18] Bus Control. This parameter is N2 format.

54 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.5.3 4-3* Motor Feedback Monitoring Speed

130BA221.10
[rpm]

NOTICE
Warning 61, Feedback error is active as soon as the value
in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error is
exceeded, regardless of the setting in
ncalc
parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. Alarm 61,
Feedback error is related to the motor feedback loss nactual

function.
4 4
P 4-31
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function
Option: Function:
This function is used to monitor consistency
in the feedback signal, that is if the feedback
signal is available. Select the action of the P 4-32 Time
[sec]
frequency converter if a feedback fault is
Illustration 4.13 Motor Feedback Speed Error
detected. The selected action takes place
when the feedback signal differs from the
output speed by the value set in
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
for longer than the value set in Range: Function:
parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. 0.05 s* [0 - 60 Set the timeout value allowing the speed
[0] Disabled s] error set in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback
[1] Warning Speed Error to be exceeded before enabling
the function selected in parameter 4-30 Motor
[2] * Trip
Feedback Loss Function.
[3] Jog
[4] Freeze
Output 4.5.4 4-4* Adjustable Warnings 2
[5] Max Speed
[6] Switch to 4-40 Warning Freq. Low
Open Loop
Range: Function:
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error Size [0 - Use this parameter for setting a lower limit for
Range: Function: related* 500 the frequency range. When the motor speed
Hz] drops below this limit, the display reads Speed
20 Hz* [0 - 50 Hz] Select the maximum allowed error in speed
low. Warning bit 10 is set in
(output speed versus feedback).
parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word. Output relay
can be configured to indicate this warning.
LCP warning light is not lit when the limit set
is reached.

The value must not exceed the setting in

parameter 4-41 Warning Freq. High.

4-41 Warning Freq. High

Range: Function:
Size [0 - Use this parameter for setting a higher limit
related* 500 for the frequency range. When the motor
Hz] speed exceeds this limit, the display reads
Speed high. Warning bit 9 is set in
parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word. Output relay
can be configured to indicate this warning.
LCP warning light is not lit when the limit set
is reached.

The value must exceed the value in

parameter 4-40 Warning Freq. Low, and must

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 55

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4-41 Warning Freq. High 4-56 Warning Feedback Low

Range: Function: Range: Function:
not exceed the value in parameter 4-14 Motor -4999 [-4999 - 4999 Use this parameter to set a
Speed High Limit [Hz]. ProcessCtrlUnit* ProcessCtrlUnit] low limit for the feedback
range. When the feedback
4-42 Adjustable Temperature Warning drops below this limit, the
Range: Function: display shows Feedb Low. Bit
6 is set in
0* [ 0 - 200 ] Use this parameter to set the motor temperature
4 4 limit.
parameter 16-94 Ext. Status
Word. The output relay or the
digital output can be
4.5.5 4-5* Adjustable Warnings configured to indicate this
warning. The LCP warning
Use these parameters to adjust warning limits for current, light is not turned on when
speed, reference, and feedback. this parameter set limit is
reached.
4-50 Warning Current Low
Range: Function: 4-57 Warning Feedback High
0 A* [ 0 - 500 Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current Range: Function:
A] drops below this limit, a bit in the status word
4999 [-4999 - 4999 Use this parameter to set a
is set. This value can also be programmed to
ProcessCtrlUnit* ProcessCtrlUnit] high limit for the feedback
produce a signal on the digital output or the
range. When the feedback
relay output.
exceeds this limit, the display
reads Feedb High. Bit 5 is set
4-51 Warning Current High
in parameter 16-94 Ext. Status
Range: Function: Word. The output relay or the
Size [ 0.0 - Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor digital output can be
related* 500.00 A] current exceeds this limit, a bit in the configured to indicate this
status word is set. This value can also warning. The LCP warning
be programmed to produce a signal on light is not turned on when
the digital output or the relay output. this parameter set limit is
reached.
4-54 Warning Reference Low
Range: Function: 4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function
-4999* [-4999 - Enter the low reference limit. When the actual Option: Function:
4999 ] reference drops below this limit, the display [0] Off No alarm is shown if a missing motor phase occurs.
shows RefLOW. Bit 20 is set in
[1] * On An alarm is shown if a missing motor phase occurs.
parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word. The output
relay or the digital output can be configured
to indicate this warning. The LCP warning 4.5.6 4-6* Speed Bypass
light is not turned on when this parameter set
limit is reached.
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]
Range: Function:
4-55 Warning Reference High
0 Hz* [0 - Some systems call for avoiding certain output
Range: Function:
500 Hz] speeds due to resonance problems in the
4999* [-4999 - Use this parameter to set a high limit for the
system. Enter the lower limits of the speeds to
4999 ] reference range. When the actual reference
be avoided.
exceeds this limit, the display shows RefHIGH. Bit
19 is set in parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word. The bypass speed from must not exceed the
The output relay or the digital output can be setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit
configured to indicate this warning. The LCP [Hz].
warning light is not turned on when this
parameter set limit is reached.

56 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] Logic 0⇒coasting stop.

Logic 1 to Logic 0⇒reset.
Range: Function:
[4] Quick stop Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in
0 Hz* [0 - Some systems call for avoiding certain output
inverse accordance with the quick stop ramp time set
500 Hz] speeds due to resonance problems in the
in parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When
system. Enter the upper limits of the speeds to
the motor stops, the shaft is in free mode.
be avoided.
Logic 0⇒ Quick-stop.
The bypass speed to must not exceed the [5] DC-brake Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops the
setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit
4 4
inverse motor by energizing it with a DC current for a
[Hz]. certain time period. See parameter 2-01 DC
Brake Current to parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In
4.6 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out Speed [Hz]. The function is only active when
the value in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is
4.6.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode different from 0. Logic 0=>DC braking.

Parameters for configuring the input and output using

[6] Stop NOTICE
inverse
NPN and PNP. When the frequency converter is at the
torque limit and has received a stop
5-00 Digital Input Mode command, it may not stop by itself. To
Option: Function: ensure that the frequency converter
Set NPN or PNP mode for digital inputs. stops, configure a digital output to [27]
Torque limit and stop and connect this
NOTICE digital output to a digital input that is
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the configured as coast.
motor is running. Stop inverted function. Generates a stop
function when the selected terminal goes from
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (0). PNP systems logic 1 to logic 0. The stop is performed
are pulled down to ground (GND). according to the selected ramp time
[1] NPN Action on negative directional pulses (1). NPN (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time,
systems are pulled up to +24 V, internally in the parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time,
frequency converter. parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time,
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time).
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [8] Start Select start for a start/stop command. Logic 1
= start, logic 0 = stop.
Option: Function:
[9] Latched The motor starts when a pulse is applied for
[0] * Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
start minimum 4 ms. The motor stops when stop
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output. commands are given.
[10] Reversing Change the direction of motor shaft rotation.
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode Select logic 1 to reverse. The reversing signal
Option: Function: only changes the direction of rotation. It does
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input. not activate the start function. Select both
directions in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
Direction. The function is not active in process
closed loop.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
[11] Start Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
in the frequency converter.
reversing same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
5-10 to 5-16 Digital Inputs the same time.
[0] No No reaction to signals transmitted to the [12] Enable Disengages the counterclockwise movement
operation terminal. start and allows for the clockwise direction.
[1] Reset Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/ALARM. forward
Not all alarms can be reset. [13] Enable Disengages the clockwise movement and
[2] Coast Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The start allows for the counterclockwise direction.
inverse frequency converter leaves the motor in free reverse
mode. [14] Jog Use to activate jog speed. See
Logic 0⇒ coasting stop. parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
[3] Coast and Reset and coasting stop inverted input (NC).
reset Leaves motor in free mode and resets
inverse frequency converter.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 57

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

[15] Preset Shifts between external reference and preset Shut down Catch up
reference reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset Unchanged speed 0 0
on has been selected in parameter 3-04 Reference Reduced by %-value 1 0
Function. Logic 0 = external reference active; Increased by %-value 0 1
logic 1 = 1 of the 8 preset references is active. Reduced by %-value 1 1
[16] Preset ref Preset ref. bits 0, 1, and 2 enable the selection
bit 0 of 1 of the 8 preset references according to Table 4.5 Shut Down/Catch Up
Table 4.4.
[22] Speed Same as [21] Speed up.
4 4
[17] Preset ref Same as [16] Preset ref bit 0.
bit 1 down
[18] Preset ref Same as [16] Preset ref bit 0. [23] Set-up Select [23] Set-up select bit 0 to select 1 of the 2
bit 2 select set-ups. Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to [9]
bit 0 Multi Set-up.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0 [28] Catch Increases reference value by percentage (relative)
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0 up set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1 [29] Slow Reduces reference value by percentage (relative)
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0 down set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1 [32] Pulse (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Measures the duration
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0 input between pulse flanks. This parameter has a higher
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1 resolution at lower frequencies, but is not as
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0 precise at higher frequencies. This principle has a
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1 cut-off frequency, which makes it unsuited for
encoders with low resolutions (for example 30
Table 4.4 Preset Ref. Bit PPR) at low speeds.

Speed [rpm] Speed [rpm]

130BB462.10
[19] Freeze Freezes the actual reference, which is now the
ref point of enable/condition for [21] Speed up and [22]
Speed down to be used. If [21] Speed up or [22] a Time[sec] b Time[sec]
Speed down is used, the speed change always
a: Low encoder b: Standard encoder
follows ramp 2 (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up
resolution resolution
Time and parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
in the range 0–parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
NOTICE
Pulse

130BB464.10
[20] Freeze Timer
Sample time
Time counter
output
When [20] Freeze output is active, the
Time Start Read Timer: Read Timer:
20 timer tides 20 timer tides

frequency converter cannot be stopped by

setting the signal on [8] Start to low. Stop Illustration 4.14 Duration Between Pulse Flanks
the frequency converter via a terminal
programmed for [2] Coasting inverse or [3]
Coast and reset, inverse. [34] Ramp Enables a selection from the 4 ramps available,
Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is bit 0 according to Table 4.6.
now the point of enable/condition for [21] Speed [35] Ramp Same as ramp bit 0.
up and [22] Speed down to be used. If [21] Speed up bit 1
or [22] Speed down is used, the speed change
always follows ramp 2 (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Preset ramp bit 1 0
Ramp Up Time and parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Ramp 1 0 0
Down Time) in the range 0–parameter 1-23 Motor Ramp 2 0 1
Frequency. Ramp 3 1 0
[21] Speed Select [21] Speed up and [22] Speed down if digital Ramp 4 1 1
up control of the up/down speed is needed (motor
potentiometer). Activate this function by selecting Table 4.6 Preset Ramp Bits
either [19] Freeze reference or [20] Freeze output.
When speed up/down is activated for less than 400 [45] Latched The motor starts to run reverse when a pulse
ms, the resulting reference is increased/decreased start is applied for minimum 4 ms. The motor stops
by 0.1%. If speed up/down is activated for more reverse when stop commands are given.
than 400 ms, the resulting reference follows the [51] External This function makes it possible to give an
setting in ramping up/down parameter 3-51/3-52. interlock external fault to the frequency converter. This

58 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

fault is treated in the same way as an parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [2]
internally generated alarm. Position Control.
[55] DigiPot Increase signal to the digital potentiometer [162] Pos. Idx Position index bit 0. This option is only
increase function described in parameter group 3-9* Bit0 effective when parameter 37-00 Application
Digital Pot. Meter. Mode is set to [2] Position Control.
[56] DigiPot Decrease signal to the digital potentiometer [163] Pos. Idx Position index bit 1. This option is only
decrease function described in parameter group 3-9* Bit1 effective when parameter 37-00 Application
Digital Pot. Meter. Mode is set to [2] Position Control.

4 4
[57] DigiPot Clear the digital potentiometer reference [164] Pos. Idx Position index bit 2. This option is only
clear described in parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot. Bit2 effective when parameter 37-00 Application
Meter. Mode is set to [2] Position Control.
[60] Counter A Input for increment counting in the SLC [165] Core The core diameter source. Off means core 1 is
(up) counter. diameter selected, and on means that core 2 is
[61] Counter A Input for decrement counting in the SLC source selected. This option is only effective when
(down) counter. parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [1]
[62] Reset Input for reset of counter A. Center winder.
Counter A [166] New Configures whether to select partial roll
[63] Counter B Input for increment counting in the SLC diameter diameter (off) or core diameter (on). This
(up) counter. select option is only effective when
[64] Counter B Input for decrement counting in the SLC parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [1]
(down) counter. Center winder.
[65] Reset Input for reset of counter B. [167] Reset Resets the diameter. This option is only
Counter B diameter effective when parameter 37-00 Application
[72] PID error Inverts the resulting error from the process Mode is set to [1] Center winder.
inverse PID controller. Available only if [168] Winder jog Enables jog forward during center winding.
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [6] forward This option is only effective when
Surface Winder or [7] Extended PID Speed OL. parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [1]
[73] PID reset I- Resets the I-part of the process PID controller. Center winder.
part Equivalent to parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part [169] Winder jog Enables jog reverse during center winding.
Reset. Available only when reverse This option is only effective when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [6] parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [1]
Surface Winder or [7] Extended PID Speed OL. Center winder.
[74] PID enable This option enables the extended process PID [170] Tension on Enables tension PID control. This option is
controller. Equivalent to only effective when
parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID. parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [1]
Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration Center winder.
Mode is set to [7] Extended PID Speed OL.
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input
[150] Go To The frequency converter moves to the home
Home position.
Option: Function:
[151] Home Ref. Indicates the status of the home referenced [8] * Start Functions are described in parameter group 5-1*
Switch switch. On means that the home position is Digital Inputs.
reached, off means that the home position is
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input
not reached.
Option: Function:
[155] HW Limit The positive hardware position limit is
Positive exceeded. This option is active on the falling [10] * Reversing Functions are described in parameter group 5-1*
edge. Digital Inputs.

[156] HW Limit The negative hardware position limit is 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Negative exceeded. This option is active on the falling
Option: Function:
edge.
[2] * Coast inverse Functions are described in parameter group
[157] Pos. Quick Stops the frequency converter during
5-1* Digital Inputs.
Stop Inv positioning with the ramp time that is set in
parameter 32-81 Motion Ctrl Quick Stop Ramp. 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
This option is only effective when
Option: Function:
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to [2]
[14] * Jog Functions are described in parameter group
Position Control.
5-1* Digital Inputs.
[160] Go To The frequency converter moves to the target
[32] Pulse input
Target Pos. position. This option is only effective when

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 59

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [8] Run on The motor runs at reference speed. No
reference / no warnings.
Option: Function:
warning
[0] * No operation Functions are described in parameter
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output.
group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
[10] Alarm or An alarm or a warning activates the
[82] Encoder input B
warning output.
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [11] At torque limit The torque limit set in
Option: Function: parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

4 4
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
[0] No operation Functions are described in parameter
Mode has been exceeded.
group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range
[16] * Preset ref bit 0
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
[32] Pulse input
[13] Below current, The motor current is lower than set in
[81] Enocder input A
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.
5-16 Terminal 31 Digital Input [14] Above current, The motor current is higher than set in
Option: Function: high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
[15] Out of Output frequency is outside the
[0] No operation Functions are described in parameter group
frequency frequency range.
5-1* Digital Inputs.
range
[16] Below The output speed is lower than the
4.6.2 5-3* Digital Outputs frequency, low setting in parameter 4-40 Warning Freq.
Low.
The 2 solid-state digital outputs are common for terminals [17] Above The output speed is higher than the
27 and 29. Set the I/O function for terminal 27 in frequency, high setting in parameter 4-41 Warning Freq.
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function High.
for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode. [18] Out of The feedback is outside the range set in
feedback range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and
Terminals 42 and 45 can also be configured as digital parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
outputs. [19] Below The feedback is below the limit set in
feedback low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
NOTICE [20] Above The feedback is above the limit set in
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
running. [21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
5-30 to 5-31 Digital Outputs motor, the frequency converter, the brake
[0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay resistor, or the thermistor.
outputs. [22] Ready, no The frequency converter is ready for
[1] Control ready The control card is ready. thermal operation, and there is no overtem-
warning perature warning.
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for
operation and applies a supply signal on [23] Remote, ready, The frequency converter is ready for
the control board. no thermal operation and is in auto-on mode. There
warning is no overtemperature warning.
[3] Drive ready / The frequency converter is ready for
remote control operation and is in auto-on mode. [24] Ready, no The frequency converter is ready for
overvoltage/ operation and the mains voltage is within
[4] Enable / no Ready for operation. No start or stop
undervoltage the specified voltage range (see General
warning command is given (start/disable). No
Specifications section in the design guide).
warnings are active.
[25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
[5] Running The motor is running and shaft torque is
clockwise when logic = 0 and counter-
present.
clockwise when logic = 1. The output
[6] Running / no The motor is running and there are no
changes as soon as the reversing signal is
warning warnings.
applied.
[7] Run in range / The motor is running within the
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via
no warning programmed current and speed ranges
the serial communication port.
set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low
[27] Torque limit Use in performing a coast stop and in
to parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
and stop torque limit condition. If the frequency
There are no warnings.

60 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

converter has received a stop signal and [63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
is at the torque limit, the signal is logic 0. comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[28] Brake, no brake The brake is active and there are no output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
warning warnings. [64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
[29] Brake ready, no The brake is ready for operation and comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
fault there are no faults. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[30] Brake fault The output is logic 1 when the brake [65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
(IGBT) IGBT is short-circuited. Use this function comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the

4 4
to protect the frequency converter if output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
there is a fault on the brake modules. Use [70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
the output/relay to cut out the mains logic rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
voltage from the frequency converter. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[31] Relay 123 The relay is activated when [0] Control [71] Logic Rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
Word is selected in parameter group 8-** logic rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Communications and Options. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[32] Mechanical Enables control of an external mechanical [72] Logic Rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
brake control brake. See parameter group 2-2* logic rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Mechanical Brake for more details. output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
[36] Control word [73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
bit 11 logic rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[37] Control word output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
bit 12 [74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
[40] Out of ref This option is active when the actual logic rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
range speed is outside the settings in output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low to [75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
parameter 4-55 Warning Reference High. logic rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[41] Below This option is active when the actual output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
reference low speed is below the speed reference [80] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
setting. Output A The output goes high whenever the
[42] Above This option is active when the actual smart logic action [38] Set dig. out. A high
reference high speed is above the speed reference is executed. The output goes low
setting. whenever the smart logic action [32] Set
[45] Bus Ctrl Controls output via fieldbus. The state of dig. out. A low is executed.
the output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital [81] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
& Relay Bus Control. The output state is Output B The input goes high whenever the smart
retained in the event of fieldbus timeout. logic action [39] Set dig. out. B high is
[46] Bus Ctrl On at Controls output via fieldbus. The state of executed. The input goes low whenever
timeout the output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital the smart logic action [33] Set dig. out. B
& Relay Bus Control. When bus timeout low is executed.
occurs, the output state is set high (On). [82] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[47] Bus Ctrl Off at Output C The input goes high whenever the smart
timeout logic action [40] Set dig. out. C high is
[55] Pulse output executed. The input goes low whenever
[56] Heat sink the smart logic action [34] Set dig. out. C
cleaning low is executed.
warning, high [83] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If Output D The input goes high whenever the smart
comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the logic action [41] Set dig. out. D high is
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. executed. The input goes low whenever
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If the smart logic action [35] Set dig. out. D
comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the low is executed.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. [160] No alarm The output is high when no alarm is
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If present.
comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the [161] Running The output is high when the frequency
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. reverse converter is running counterclockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
Running AND Reverse).

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 61

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

[165] Local reference 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output

active
Option: Function:
[166] Remote ref
[0] * No operation Functions are described in parameter group
active
5-3* Digital Outputs.
[167] Start command The output is high when there is an
active active start command, and no stop 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output
command is active. Option: Function:
[168] Drive in hand The output is high when the frequency
[0] * No operation Functions are described in parameter group

4 4
mode converter is in hand-on mode.
5-3* Digital Outputs.
[169] Drive in auto The output is high when the frequency
mode converter is in auto-on mode. 5-34 On Delay, Digital Output
[170] Homing The homing operation is completed. This Range: Function:
Completed option is only effective when 0.01 s* [0 - 600 s]
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to
[2] Position Control. 5-35 Off Delay, Digital Output
[171] Target Position The target position is reached. This option Range: Function:
Reached is only effective when 0.01 s* [0 - 600 s]
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to
[2] Position Control.
[172] Position A fault occurred in the positioning
4.6.3 5-4* Relays
Control Fault process. Refer to parameter 37-18 Pos. Ctrl
Fault Reason for details about the fault.
Parameters for configuring the timing and the output
This option is only effective when
functions for the relays.
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to
[2] Position Control. The parameter is an array parameter representing 2 relays:
[173] Position Mech Selects mechanical control for positioning. Array [2] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1]).
Brake This option is only effective when 5-40 Function Relay
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to
Option: Function:
[2] Position Control.
[0] No operation Default setting for all digital and relay
[174] TLD indicator Indicates whether the tension is out of
outputs.
limit (on) during center winding. This
option is only effective when [1] Control Ready The control card is ready.
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready to
[1] Center winder.
operate. Mains and control supplies are
[175] Running on Indicates whether tension PID control is OK.
tension active (on) or inactive (off). This option is
only effective when [3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl The frequency converter is ready for
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to operation and is in auto-on mode.
[1] Center winder. [4] Stand-by / no Ready for operation. No start or stop
[176] Ready to run The center winder control is ready to run. warning commands have been applied. No
This option is only effective when warnings are active.
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to
[5] Running The motor is running and a shaft
[1] Center winder.
torque is present.
[177] End of roll The diameter limit is reached. This option
is only effective when [6] Running / no The motor is running and no warnings
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set to warning are present.
[1] Center winder. [7] Run in range/no The motor is running within the
[193] Sleep mode The frequency converter/system has warn programmed current ranges set in
entered sleep mode. See parameter group parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.
22-4* Sleep Mode.
[8] Run on ref/no The motor runs at reference speed. No
[194] Broken belt A broken belt condition has been
warn warnings.
detected. See parameter group 22-4* Sleep
Mode. [9] Alarm An alarm activates the output.

[10] Alarm or warning An alarm or warning activates the

output.

62 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in [27] Torque limit & Use for performing a coasted stop for
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode stop frequency converter in torque limit
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit condition. If the frequency converter
Generator Mode has been exceeded. has received a stop signal and is in
torque limit, the signal is logic = 0.
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [28] Brake, no brake The brake is active and there are no

[13] Below current, The motor current is lower than set in

warning warnings. 4 4
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. [29] Brake ready, no The brake is ready for operation and
fault there are no faults.
[14] Above current, The motor current is higher than set in
high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. [30] Brake fault (IGBT) The output is logic = 1 when the brake
IGBT is short-circuited. Use this
[15] Out of frequency The output speed/frequency exceeds
function to protect the frequency
range the limit that is set in
converter if there is a fault on the
parameter 4-40 Warning Freq. Low and
brake module. Use the digital output/
parameter 4-41 Warning Freq. High.
relay to cut out the mains voltage from
[16] Below frequency, The output frequency is lower than the the frequency converter.
low setting in parameter 4-40 Warning Freq.
[31] Relay 123 Digital output/relay is activated when
Low.
[0] Control word is selected in
[17] Above frequency, The frequency is higher than the parameter group 8-** Comm. and
high setting in parameter 4-41 Warning Freq. Options.
High.
[32] Mech brake ctrl Selection of mechanical brake control.
[18] Out of feedb. The feedback is outside the range set When selected parameters in parameter
range in parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback group 2-2* Mechanical Brake are active,
Low and parameter 4-57 Warning the output must be reinforced to carry
Feedback High. the current for the coil in the brake.
[19] Below feedback, The feedback is below the limit set in This issue is solved by connecting an
low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low. external relay to the selected digital
output.
[20] Above feedback, The feedback is above the limit set in
high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [36] Control word bit Activate relay 1 by a control word from
11 the fieldbus. No other functional
[21] Thermal warning Thermal warning turns on when the
impact on the frequency converter.
temperature exceeds the limit within
Typical application: Controlling an
the motor, frequency converter, brake
auxiliary device from a fieldbus. The
resistor, or connected resistor.
function is valid when [0] FC Profile is
[22] Ready, no thermal The frequency converter is ready for selected in parameter 8-10 Control Word
warning operation and there is no overtem- Profile.
perature warning.
[37] Control word bit Activate relay 2 by a control word from
[23] Remote,ready,no The frequency converter is ready for 12 the fieldbus. No other functional
TW operation and is in auto-on mode. impact on the frequency converter.
There is no overtemperature warning. Typical application: Controlling an
auxiliary device from a fieldbus. The
[24] Ready, no over-/ The frequency converter is ready for
function is valid when [0] FC Profile is
under voltage operation, and the mains voltage is
selected in parameter 8-10 Control Word
within the specified voltage range.
Profile.
[25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
[40] Out of ref range Active when the actual speed is
clockwise when logic = 0 and counter-
outside the settings in
clockwise when logic = 1. The output
parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
changes as soon as the reversing signal
and parameter 4-55 Warning Reference
is applied.
High.
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no timeout) via
[41] Below reference, Active when the actual speed is below
the serial communication port.
low the speed reference setting.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 63

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[42] Above ref, high Active when the actual speed is above output goes high. Otherwise, it goes
the speed reference setting. low.

[45] Bus ctrl. Controls the digital output/relay via [72] Logic rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules.
bus. The state of the output is set in If logic rule 2 in SLC is TRUE, the
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus output goes high. Otherwise, it goes
Control. The output state is retained in low.
4 4 the event of a bus timeout.
[73] Logic rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules.
[46] Bus control, Controls output via bus. The state of If logic rule 3 in SLC is TRUE, the
timeout: On the output is set in output goes high. Otherwise, it goes
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus low.
Control. When a bus timeout occurs,
[74] Logic rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules.
the output state is set high (on).
If logic rule 4 in SLC is TRUE, the
[47] Bus control, Controls output via bus. The state of output goes high. Otherwise, it goes
timeout: Off the output is set in low.
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
[75] Logic rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules.
Control. When a bus timeout occurs,
If logic rule 5 in SLC is TRUE, the
the output state is set low (off).
output goes high. Otherwise, it goes
[56] Heat sink low.
cleaning warning,
[80] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
high
A Action. Output A is low on [32] Smart
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic Logic Action. Output A is high on [38]
Control. If comparator 0 in SLC is TRUE, Smart Logic Action.
the output goes high. Otherwise, it
goes low. [81] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
B Action. Output B is low on [32] Smart
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic Logic Action. Output B is high on [38]
Control. If comparator 1 in SLC is TRUE, Smart Logic Action.
the output goes high. Otherwise, it
goes low. [82] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
C Action. Output C is low on [32] Smart
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic Logic Action. Output C is high on [38]
Control. If comparator 2 in SLC is TRUE, Smart Logic Action.
the output goes high. Otherwise, it
goes low. [83] SL digital output See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
D Action. Output D is low on [32] Smart
[63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic Logic Action. Output D is high on [38]
Control. If comparator 3 in SLC is TRUE, Smart Logic Action.
the output goes high. Otherwise, it
goes low. [160] No alarm The output is high when no alarm is
present.
[64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic
Control. If comparator 4 in SLC is TRUE, [161] Running reverse The output is high when the frequency
the output goes high. Otherwise, it converter is running counterclockwise
goes low. (the logical product of the status bits
Running AND Reverse).
[65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Smart Logic
Control. If comparator 5 in SLC is TRUE, [165] Local ref active
the output goes high. Otherwise, it [166] Remote ref active
goes low. [167] Start command The output is high when there is an
activ active start command, and no stop
[70] Logic rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules.
command is active.
If logic rule 0 in SLC is TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it goes [168] Drive in hand The output is high when the frequency
low. mode converter is in hand-on mode.

[71] Logic rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. [169] Drive in auto The output is high when the frequency
If logic rule 1 in SLC is TRUE, the mode converter is in auto-on mode.

64 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-40 Function Relay

130BA171.10
Selected
Option: Function: Event
[170] Homing The homing operation is completed.
Completed This option is only effective when Relay
output
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set
to [2] Position Control. On Delay Off Delay
P 5-41 P 5-42
[171] Target Position The target position is reached. This
Reached option is only effective when
4 4
Selected
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set Event
to [2] Position Control.
Relay
[172] Position Control A fault occurred in the positioning output
Fault process. Refer to parameter 37-18 Pos.
Ctrl Fault Reason for details about the On Delay
P 5-41
fault. This option is only effective when
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set Illustration 4.15 On Delay, Relay
to [2] Position Control.

[173] Position Mech Selects mechanical control for

Brake positioning. This option is only
5-42 Off Delay, Relay
effective when Array[2]: Relay1[0], Relay2[1]
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set Range: Function:
to [2] Position Control. 0.01 s* [0 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cutout time.
[175] Running on Indicates whether tension PID control

130BA172.10
tension is active (on) or inactive (off). This
option is only effective when
Selected
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set
Event
to [1] Center winder.

[176] Ready to run The center winder control is ready to

Relay
run. This option is only effective when output
parameter 37-00 Application Mode is set
to [1] Center winder. On Delay Off Delay
P 5-41 P 5-42
[193] Sleep Mode The frequency converter/system has
entered sleep mode. See parameter Illustration 4.16 Off Delay, Relay
group 22-4* Sleep Mode.

[194] Broken Belt A broken belt condition has been

If the selected event condition changes before the on- or
Function detected. See parameter group 22-4*
off delay timer expires, the relay output is unaffected.
Sleep Mode.

5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [2] (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1])
Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time. The
relay only cuts in if the condition in
parameter 5-40 Function Relay is uninter-
rupted during the specified time.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 65

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4.6.4 5-5* Pulse Input 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
The pulse input parameters are used to define an Size [-4999 - Enter the high reference value [Hz] for the
appropriate window for the impulse reference area by related* 4999 ] motor shaft speed, and the high feedback
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse value. See also parameter 5-58 Term. 33
inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference High Ref./Feedb. Value. Select terminal 29
inputs. Set terminal 29 (parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital as a digital input (parameter 5-02 Terminal
Input) or terminal 33 (parameter 5-15 Terminal 33 Digital 29 Mode = [0] Input (default) and

4 4
Input) to [32] Pulse input. If terminal 29 is used as an input, parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input =
then set parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode to [0] Input. applicable value).

5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency

130BD377.10
Ref.

High Range: Function:

ref.
value 4 Hz* [4 - 31999 Enter the low frequency corresponding to
P 5-53/
p 5-58 Hz] the low motor shaft speed (which is low
reference value) in parameter 5-57 Term. 33
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency

Low
ref. Range: Function:
value
P 5-52/
p 5-57 Low freq. High freq. Input 32000 [5 - 32000 Enter the high frequency corresponding
P 5-50/ P 5-51/ (Hz)
P 5-55 P 5-56 Hz* Hz] to the high motor shaft speed (that is
Illustration 4.17 Pulse Input high reference value) in
parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
4 Hz* [4 - 31999 Enter the low frequency limit corresponding
0* [-4999 - Enter the low reference value [Hz] for the
Hz] to the low motor shaft speed (that is low
4999 ] motor shaft speed. This value is also the low
reference value) in parameter 5-52 Term. 29
feedback value. See also parameter 5-52 Term.
Low Ref./Feedb. Value. Refer to
29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Illustration 4.17.

5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size related* [-4999 - Enter the high reference value [Hz]
32000 [5 - 32000 Enter the high frequency limit
4999 ] for the motor shaft speed. See also
Hz* Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./
speed (which is high reference value) in
Feedb. Value.
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.
Value.

5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
0* [-4999 - Enter the low reference value limit for the motor
4999 ] shaft speed [Hz]. This value is also the lowest
feedback value. See also parameter 5-57 Term. 33
Low Ref./Feedb. Value. Set terminal 29 to digital
input (parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode = [0]
Input and parameter 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input
= applicable value).

66 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.6.5 5-6* Pulse Outputs 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

Option: Function:
NOTICE [45] Bus ctrl.
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is [48] Bus ctrl., timeout
running. [100] Output frequency
[101] Reference
Use these parameters to configure pulse outputs with their [102] Process Feedback
functions and scaling. Terminal 27 and 29 are allocated to [103] Motor Current
pulse output via parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
[104] Torque rel to limit 4 4
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
Output value

130BA089.11
[107] Speed
[109] Max Out Freq
[113] PID Clamped Output
High output
value
P 5-60(term27) 5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq 29
P 5-63(term29) Range: Function:
5000 Hz* [4 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for terminal
Hz] 29 corresponding to the output variable
set in parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse
Output Variable.

High freq. Output

P 5-62(term27) (Hz) 4.6.6 5-7* 24 V Encoder Input
P 5-65(term29)
Illustration 4.18 Configuration of Pulse Outputs Connect the 24 V encoder to terminal 12 (24 V DC supply),
terminal 32 (channel A), terminal 33 (channel B), and
terminal 20 (GND). The digital inputs 32/33 are active for
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable encoder inputs when [1] 24 V encoder is selected in
Select the desired output on terminal 27. parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source. The encoder is a
dual channel (A and B) 24 V type. Maximum input
Option: Function:
frequency: 32 kHz.
[0] * No operation
[45] Bus ctrl.
Encoder connection to the frequency converter
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
24 V incremental encoder. Maximum cable length is 5 m
[100] Output frequency
(16.4 ft).
[101] Reference
[102] Process Feedback
[103] Motor Current
[104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[109] Max Out Freq
[113] PID Clamped Output

5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq 27

Range: Function:
5000 Hz* [4 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for terminal
Hz] 27, corresponding to the output variable
selected in parameter 5-60 Terminal 27
Pulse Output Variable.

5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

Option: Function:
[0] * No operation

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 67

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

+24 V DC
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction

130BD366.12
GND
Option: Function:

A
B
12 18 19 27 29 32 33 20
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

Change the detected encoder rotation

direction without changing the wiring to the
4 4 encoder.

[0] * Clockwise Set channel A 90° (electrical degrees) behind

channel B after clockwise rotation of the
encoder shaft.

[1] Counter Set channel A 90° (electrical degrees) ahead

clockwise of channel B after clockwise rotation of the
encoder shaft.

4.6.7 5-9* Bus Controlled

This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via a

fieldbus setting.

5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFF ] This parameter holds the state of the bus-
controlled digital outputs and relays.
Illustration 4.19 24 V or 10–30 V Encoder Connection
A logical 1 indicates that the output is
high or active.
A logical 0 indicates that the output is
130BA646.10

CW low or inactive.
A

Bit 0 Digital output terminal 27

B Bit 1 Digital output terminal 29
Bit 2–3 Reserved
Bit 4 Relay 1 output terminal
Bit 6–23 Reserved
Bit 24 Terminal 42 digital output
Bit 26–31 Reserved

CCW Table 4.7 Bit Functions

A

5-93 Pulse Out 27 Bus Control

Range: Function:
B
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to the
Illustration 4.20 Encoder Rotation Direction 100 %] output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution Variable.
Range: Function:
5-94 Pulse Out 27 Timeout Preset
1024* [1 - 4096 ] Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the
motor shaft. Read the correct value from the Range: Function:
encoder. 0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to the
100 %] output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in

68 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

5-94 Pulse Out 27 Timeout Preset 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Range: Function: Option: Function:
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [3] Jogging
and a timeout is detected. [4] Max. speed
[5] Stop and
5-95 Pulse Out 29 Bus Control trip
Range: Function:
Ref./Feedback

130BD378.11
0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to the
100 %] output terminal 29 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in Par 6-xx
4 4
High Ref./ 50
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output
Feedb. Value'
Variable. 40

30
5-96 Pulse Out 29 Timeout Preset
Range: Function: 20

0 %* [0 - Set the output frequency transferred to the Par 6-xx 10

100 %] output terminal 29 when the terminal is Low Ref./ 5
Feedb. Value'
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in 1V 5V 10 V [V]
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Par 6-xx Analog input
Variable, and a timeout is detected. 'Low Voltage'or
'Low Current'

4.7 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out Par 6-xx

'High Voltage'or
'High Current'
Parameter group for setting up the analog I/O configu-
Illustration 4.21 Timeout Function
ration and the digital output.

The frequency converter provides 2 analog inputs:

• Terminal 53. 4.7.2 6-1* Analog Input 53
• Terminal 54. Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
The analog inputs can be freely allocated to either voltage input 53 (terminal 53).
(0–10 V) or current input (0/4–20 mA).
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
Range: Function:
4.7.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode
0.07 V* [0 - 10 Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to
V] parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
Value. To activate parameter 6-01 Live Zero
Range: Function: Timeout Function, set the value to >1 V.
10 s* [1 - 99 s] Enter the timeout time.
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Range: Function:
Option: Function: 10 V* [0 - 10 V] Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the
Select the timeout function. The function set high reference value (set in
in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or Value).
54 is below 50% of the value in
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage, 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, Range: Function:
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage, or
4 mA* [0 - 20 Enter the low current value. This reference
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a
mA] signal corresponds to the low reference/
time period defined in parameter 6-00 Live
feedback value that is set in
Zero Timeout Time.
parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
[0] * Off Value. To activate parameter 6-01 Live Zero
[1] Freeze Timeout Function, set the value to >2 mA.
output
[2] Stop

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 69

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

Range: Function: Range: Function:
20 mA* [0 - 20 Enter the high current value corresponding 10 V* [0 - 10 V] Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the
mA] to the high reference/feedback set in high reference value (set in
parameter 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
Value. Value).

6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

4 4 Range: Function: Range: Function:

0* [-4999 - Enter the reference or feedback value that 4 mA* [0 - 20 Enter the low current value. This reference
4999 ] corresponds to the voltage or current set in mA] signal corresponds to the low reference/
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage to feedback value set in parameter 6-24 Terminal
parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current. 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value. To activate the live
zero timeout function in parameter 6-01 Live
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value Zero Timeout Function, set the value to >2 mA.
Range: Function:
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Size [-4999 - Enter the reference or feedback value
related* 4999 ] that corresponds to the voltage or Range: Function:
current set in parameter 6-11 Terminal 20 mA* [0 - 20 Enter the high current value corresponding
53 High Voltage to mA] to the high reference/feedback value set in
parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High parameter 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
Current. Value.

6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 Enter the time constant. This constant is a 0* [-4999 - Enter the reference or feedback value that
s] first-order digital low-pass filter time 4999 ] corresponds to the voltage or current set in
constant for suppressing electrical noise in parameter 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage/
terminal 53. A high time constant value parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.
improves dampening, but also increases the
time delay through the filter. 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
6-19 Terminal 53 mode
Size [-4999 - Enter the reference or feedback value
Select whether terminal 53 is used for current or voltage input. related* 4999 ] that corresponds to the voltage or
Option: Function: current set in parameter 6-21 Terminal
[0] Current mode 54 High Voltage/
[1] * Voltage mode parameter 6-23 Terminal 54 High
Current.

4.7.3 6-2* Analog Input 54 6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

Range: Function:
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for analog
input 54 (terminal 54). 0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 Enter the time constant, which is a first-
s] order digital low-pass filter time constant
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
Range: Function: 54. A high time constant value improves
0.07 V* [0 - 10 Enter the voltage (V) that corresponds to the dampening, but also increases the time
V] low reference value (set in delay through the filter.
parameter 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value). To activate parameter 6-01 Live Zero 6-29 Terminal 54 mode
Timeout Function, set the value to >1 V. Option: Function:
Select if terminal 54 is used for current
input or voltage input.

[0] Current mode

[1] * Voltage mode

70 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.7.4 6-7* Analog/Digital Output 45 6-74 Terminal 45 Output Max Scale

Range: Function:
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for 100 %* [0 - Scale for the maximum output (20 mA) of the
analog/digital output terminal 45. Analog outputs are 200 %] analog signal at terminal 45. Set the value to
current outputs: 0/4–20 mA. Resolution on analog output be the percentage of the full range of the
is 12 bit. Analog output terminals can also be set up as variable selected in parameter 6-71 Terminal 45
digital output. Analog Output.
6-70 Terminal 45 Mode
Set terminal 45 to act as analog output or as digital output.
6-76 Terminal 45 Output Bus Control
Range: Function:
4 4
Option: Function:
0* [0 - 16384 ] Holds the level of analog output if controlled
[0] * 0-20 mA
by bus. This parameter is N2 format.
[1] 4-20 mA
[2] Digital Output
4.7.5 6-9* Analog/Digital Output 42
6-71 Terminal 45 Analog Output
Option: Function: Parameters for configuring the limits for analog/digital
[0] * No operation output terminal 42. Analog outputs are current outputs:
[100] Output frequency 0–100 Hz 0/4–20 mA. Resolution on analog outputs is 12 bit. Analog
[101] Reference MinRef–MaxRef output terminals can also be set up as digital output.

[102] Process Feedback MinFB–MaxFB 6-90 Terminal 42 Mode

Set terminal 42 to act as analog output or as digital output.
[103] Motor Current 0–Imax
Option: Function:
[104] Torque rel to limit
[0] * 0-20 mA
[105] Torq relate to rated
[1] 4-20 mA
[106] Power 0–Pnom
[2] Digital Output
[107] Speed
[111] Speed Feedback 6-91 Terminal 42 Analog Output
[113] PID Clamped Output Option: Function:
[139] Bus Control 0–100% [0] * No operation
[143] Ext. CL 1 [100] Output frequency
[162] Tapered tension set point [101] Reference
[254] DC Link Voltage [102] Process Feedback
[103] Motor Current
6-72 Terminal 45 Digital Output [104] Torque rel to limit
Option: Function: [105] Torq relate to rated
Select the function of terminal 45 as a [106] Power
digital current output. See also [107] Speed
parameter 6-70 Terminal 45 Mode. See [111] Speed Feedback
chapter 4.6.2 5-3* Digital Outputs for each [113] PID Clamped Output
option and description. [139] Bus Control
[0] * No operation [143] Ext. CL 1
[198] Drive Bypass [162] Tapered tension set point
[254] DC Link Voltage
6-73 Terminal 45 Output Min Scale
Range: Function: 6-92 Terminal 42 Digital Output
0 %* [0 - Scale for the minimum output (0 or 4 mA) of Option: Function:
200 %] the analog signal at terminal 45. Set the value See chapter 4.6.2 5-3* Digital Outputs for
to be the percentage of the full range of the each option and description.
variable selected in parameter 6-71 Terminal 45
[0] * No operation
Analog Output.
[198] Drive Bypass

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 71

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

6-93 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0 %* [0 - Scale for the minimum output (0 mA or 4 mA) [20] * None
200 %] of the analog signal at terminal 42. Set the
value to be the percentage of the full range of
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain
the variable selected in parameter 6-91 Terminal Range: Function:
42 Analog Output. 0.015* [0 - Enter the speed controller proportional gain. The
1] proportional gain amplifies the error (that is the

4 4 6-94 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Range: Function:
deviation between the feedback signal and the
setpoint). This parameter is used with
100 [0 - Scale for maximum output (20 mA) of the scaling parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1] Speed closed
%* 200 %] at terminal 42. Set the value to be the loop control. Quick control is obtained at high
amplification. However, if the amplification is too
percentage of the full range of the variable
high, the process may become unstable.
selected in parameter 6-91 Terminal 42 Analog
Output.
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time
130BB772.10

Current Range: Function:

(mA)

20
8 [2 - Enter the speed controller integral time, which
ms* 20000 determines the time the internal PID control
ms] takes to correct errors. The greater the error,
the more quickly the gain increases. The
0/4
integral time causes a delay of the signal, and
0% Analog Analog 100% Variable
output Output for therefore a dampening effect, and can be used
Min Scale Max Scale output to eliminate steady-state speed error. Obtain
par. 6-93 par. 6-94 example:
Power quick control through a short integral time,
though if the integral time is too short, the
Illustration 4.22 Output Scale versus Current process becomes unstable. An excessively long
integral time disables the integral action,
leading to major deviations from the required
reference, since the process regulator takes too
6-96 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
long to regulate errors. This parameter is used
Range: Function: with [1] Speed closed loop control set in
0* [0 - 16384 ] Hold the analog output at terminal 42 if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
controlled by bus. This parameter is N2 format.
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time
4.8 Parameters: 7-** Controllers Range: Function:
30 [0 - Enter the speed controller differentiation time.
4.8.1 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
ms* 200 ms] The differentiator does not react to constant
error. It provides gain proportional to the rate
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source of change of the speed feedback. The quicker
Option: Function: the error changes, the stronger the gain from
NOTICE the differentiator. The gain is proportional with
the speed at which errors change. Setting this
This parameter cannot be
parameter to 0 disables the differentiator. This
changed while the motor is
parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configu-
running.
ration Mode [1] Speed closed loop control.

Select feedback source for Speed CL

7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
Control.
Range: Function:
[1] 24V encoder
5* [1 - Set a limit for the gain provided by the differen-
[2] MCB 102
20 ] tiator. Since the differential gain increases at higher
[3] MCB 103 frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful. For
[6] Analog Input 53 example, set up a pure D-link at low frequencies
[7] Analog Input 54 and a constant D-link at higher frequencies. This
[8] Frequency input 29 parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration
[9] Frequency input 33 Mode [1] Speed closed loop control.

72 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time 7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
10 [1 - NOTICE Feedback

175ZA293.11
ms* 6000
Severe filtering can be detrimental to
Disturbed feedback signal

ms]
dynamic performance.

Set a time constant for the speed control low-

pass filter. The low-pass filter improves steady-
state performance and dampens oscillations on 4 4
the feedback signal. This parameter is used
0.6 t (Sec.)
with parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1]
Speed closed loop or [2] Torque closed loop. This Lowpass filter

parameter is useful if there is a great amount fg = 10 Hz

of noise in the system, see Illustration 4.23. For Feedback

example, if a time constant (τ) of 100 ms is

Filtered feedback signal
programmed, the cutoff frequency for the low-
pass filter is 1/0.1 = 10 RAD/s., corresponding
to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. The PID regulator only
regulates a feedback signal that varies by a
frequency of less than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback
signal varies by a higher frequency than 1.6 Hz,
the PID regulator does not react.
0.6 t (Sec.)
Practical settings of parameter 7-06 Speed PID
Illustration 4.23 Feedback Signal
Lowpass Filter Time taken from the number of
pulses per revolutions from encoder:

Encoder PPR Parameter 7-06 Speed

PID Lowpass Filter
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio
Time Range: Function:
512 10 ms 1* [0.0001 - 32 ]

130BA871.10
1024 5 ms
n1 n2
2048 2 ms
4096 1 ms Motor

Par 7-07=1.00 Par 7-07=n1/n2

Illustration 4.24 Speed PID Feedback Gear

Ratio

7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor

Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 500 %] The reference signal bypasses the speed
controller by the amount specified. This
feature increases the dynamic performance
of the speed control loop.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 73

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4.8.2 7-1* Torque PI Control 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource

Option: Function:
Parameters for configuring the torque PI control. [4] Frequency input
7-12 Torque PID Proportional Gain 33

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the 4.8.4 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
torque controller. Selection of a high value
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control
4 4
makes the controller react faster. Too high
a setting leads to controller instability. Option: Function:
Normal and inverse controls are implemented by
7-13 Torque PID Integration Time
introducing a difference between the reference
Range: Function: signal and the feedback signal.
0.020 s* [0.002 - 2 s] Enter the integration time for the torque
[0] * Normal Set process control to increase the output
controller. The lower the integration time,
frequency.
the faster the controller reacts. However,
too low a setting leads to controller [1] Inverse Set process control to decrease the output
instability. frequency.

7-31 Process PID Anti Windup

4.8.3 7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb. Option: Function:
[0] Off Continue regulation of an error even when the output
Select the feedback sources for the process PID control,
frequency cannot be increased or decreased.
and how this feedback should be handled.
[1] * On Cease regulation of an error when the output
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource frequency can no longer be adjusted.
Option: Function:
The effective feedback signal is made up 7-32 Process PID Start Speed
of the sum of up to 2 different input Range: Function:
signals. Select which input is treated as 0 RPM* [0 - Enter the motor speed to be attained as a
the source of the 1st of these signals. The 6000 start signal for commencement of PID
2nd input signal is defined in RPM] control. When the power is switched on, the
parameter 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 frequency converter starts to ramp and then
Resource. operates under speed open-loop control.
[0] * No function When the process PID start speed is reached,
[1] Analog Input 53 the frequency converter changes to process
PID control.
[2] Analog Input 54
[3] Frequency input
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain
29
[4] Frequency input Range: Function:
33 0.01* [0 - 10 ] Enter the PID proportional gain. The propor-
tional gain multiplies the error between the
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource setpoint and the feedback signal.
Option: Function:
The effective feedback signal is made up 7-34 Process PID Integral Time
of the sum of up to 2 different input Range: Function:
signals. Select which input is treated as 9999 s* [0.10 - Enter the PID integral time. The integrator
the source of the 2nd of these signals. 9999 s] provides an increasing gain at a constant
The 1st input signal is defined in error between the setpoint and the
parameter 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 feedback signal. The integral time is the
Resource. time needed by the integrator to reach the
[0] * No function same gain as the proportional gain.

[1] Analog Input 53

[2] Analog Input 54
[3] Frequency input
29

74 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 20 s] Enter the PID differentiation time. The differen- -100 %* [ -100 - 100 %] Enter a negative limit for the process
tiator does not react to a constant error, but PID controller output.
provides a gain only when the error changes.
The shorter the PID differentiation time, the 7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp
stronger the gain from the differentiator. Range: Function:
100 %* [ -100 - 100 %] Enter a positive limit for the process
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit
Range: Function:
PID controller output. 4 4
5* [1 - 50 ] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain. If there is 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
no limit, the differentiator gain increases when Range: Function:
there are fast changes. To obtain a pure differen-
100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
tiator gain at slow changes and a constant
100 %] process PID output when operating at the
differentiator gain where fast changes occur, limit
minimum reference. The scaling percentage is
the differentiator gain.
adjusted linearly between the scale at
minimum reference (parameter 7-43 Process PID
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
Gain Scale at Min. Ref.) and the scale at
Range: Function: maximum reference (parameter 7-44 Process
0 %* [0 - Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.).
200 %] factor sends a constant fraction of the reference
signal to bypass the PID control, so the PID 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.
control only affects the remaining fraction of the Range: Function:
control signal. Any change to this parameter
100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
affects the motor speed. When the FF factor is
100 %] process PID output when operating at the
activated, it provides less overshoot, and high
maximum reference. The scaling percentage is
dynamics when changing the setpoint.
adjusted linearly between the scale at
Parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
minimum reference (parameter 7-43 Process PID
active when parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
Gain Scale at Min. Ref.) and the scale at
is set to [3] Process.
maximum reference (parameter 7-44 Process
PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.).
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth
Range: Function: 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
5 %* [0 - Enter the on-reference bandwidth. When the Option: Function:
200 %] PID control error (the difference between the
Select which frequency converter input
reference and the feedback) is less than the
is used as the feed-forward factor. The
value of this parameter, the on-reference
FF factor is added directly to the
status bit is 1.
output of the PID controller. This
parameter can increase dynamic
4.8.5 7-4* Advanced Process PID Ctrl. performance.
The feed-forward set from bus should
be in N2 format.
This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config-
uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL. [0] * No function
[1] Analog Input 53
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset
[2] Analog Input 54
Option: Function:
[7] Frequency input 29
[0] * No
[8] Frequency input 33
[1] Yes Select [1] Yes to reset the I-part of the process PID
[11] Local bus reference
controller. The selection automatically returns to [0]
[32] Bus PCD
No. Resetting the I-part makes it possible to start from
a well-defined point after changing something in the 7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
process, for example changing a textile roll. Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to set the feed-forward factor to
treat the FF resource as a positive value.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 75

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. 7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to treat the feed-forward resource 0.01 s* [0.01 - 100 s] Control the dynamics of the feed-forward
as a negative value. signal when ramping down.

7-48 PCD Feed Forward 7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Readout parameter where the bus 0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the reference first-
4 4 parameter 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource s] order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
[32] can be read. improves steady-state performance and
The feed forward set from bus should be in N2 dampens oscillations on the reference/
format. feedback signals. However, severe filtering
can be detrimental to dynamic
7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. performance.
Option: Function:
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time
[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to use the resulting output from
the process PID controller as is. Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the feedback first-
[1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to invert the resulting output
s] order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
from the process PID controller. This operation is
improves steady-state performance and
performed after the feed-forward factor is applied.
dampens oscillations on the reference/
feedback signals. However, severe filtering
4.8.6 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl. can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config-
uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL.
4.8.7 7-6* Feedback Conversion
7-50 Process PID Extended PID
Option: Function: Use the parameter group to configure conversions for
[0] Disabled Disable the extended parts of the process PID feedback signals.
controller. 7-60 Feedback 1 Conversion
[1] * Enabled Enable the extended parts of the PID controller. Select a conversion for the feedback 1 signal. Select [0] Linear to
leave the feedback signal unchanged.
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain Option: Function:
Range: Function: [0] * Linear
1* [0 - The feed forward is used to obtain the gain, based [1] Square root
100 ] on a well-known signal available. The PID controller
then only takes care of the smaller part of the 7-62 Feedback 2 Conversion
control, necessary because of unknown characters. Select a conversion for the feedback 2 signal. Select [0] Linear to
The standard feed-forward factor in leave the feedback signal unchanged.
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is Option: Function:
always related to the reference whereas
[0] * Linear
parameter 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain has more
[1] Square root
options. In winder applications, the feed-forward
factor is typically the line speed of the system.

7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up

Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 100 s] Control dynamics of the feed-forward
signal when ramping up.

76 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.9 Parameters: 8-** Communications and 8-04 Control Timeout Function

Options Select the timeout function. The timeout function activates when
the control word fails to be updated within the time period
4.9.1 8-0* General Settings specified in parameter 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
Option: Function:
8-00 Option A warning control [3] Jogging Run the motor at jog frequency until
This parameter is used to enable or disable installed options. communication resumes.
Option: Function:
4 4
[4] Max. speed Run the motor at maximum frequency until
[0] * None communication resumes.
[1] Disable Warning
[5] Stop and trip Stop the motor and trip, then reset the
8-01 Control Site frequency converter to restart:

Option: Function: • Via the fieldbus.

The setting in this parameter overrides • Via [Reset].
the settings in parameter 8-50 Coasting • Via a digital input.
Select to parameter 8-56 Preset Reference
Select. 8-07 Diagnosis Trigger
[0] * Digital and Control by using both digital input and Option: Function:
ctrl.word control word. [0] * Disable Send no extended diagnosis data (EDD).

[1] Digital only Control by using digital inputs only. [1] Trigger on Send EDD upon alarms.
alarms
[2] Controlword Control by using control word only.
only [2] Trigger Send EDD upon alarms or warnings in
alarm/warn. parameter 16-90 Alarm Word,
8-02 Control Source parameter 9-53 Profibus Warning Word, or
Option: Function: parameter 16-92 Warning Word.

Select the source of the control word.

[0] None 4.9.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

[1] FC Port
[3] Option A PROFIBUS and PROFINET. 8-10 Control Word Profile
Select the interpretation of the control and status words
8-03 Control Timeout Time corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
Range: Function: for the installed fieldbus are visible in the LCP display.
1 s* [0.1 - Enter the maximum time expected to pass Option: Function:
6000 s] between the reception of 2 consecutive [0] * FC profile
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it indicates
[1] PROFIdrive profile
that the serial communication has stopped. The
function that is selected in 8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
parameter 8-04 Control Timeout Function is then Option: Function:
carried out.
[0] None
[1] * Profile default
8-04 Control Timeout Function
[2] CTW Valid, active low
Select the timeout function. The timeout function activates when
[4] PID error inverse
the control word fails to be updated within the time period
[5] PID reset I part
specified in parameter 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
[6] PID enable
Option: Function:
[0] * Off Resume control via fieldbus (fieldbus or 8-19 Product Code
standard), using the most recent control Range: Function:
word. Size [0 - Select 0 to read out the actual
[1] Freeze output Freeze output frequency until communi- related* 2147483647 ] fieldbus product code according
cation resumes. to the mounted fieldbus option.
Select 1 to read out the actual
[2] Stop Stop with auto restart until communication vendor ID.
resumes.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 77

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4.9.3 8-3* FC Port Settings 4.9.4 8-4* FC MC Protocol Set

8-30 Protocol 8-42 PCD Write Configuration

Option: Function: Select the parameters to be assigned to the PCD's telegrams. The
Select the protocol for the integrated RS485 number of available PCDs depends on the telegram type. The
port. values in the PCDs are then written to the selected parameters
as data values.
[0] * FC Communication according to the FC protocol.
Enter up to 16 different preset mapping 0–15 in this parameter,

4 4 [2] Modbus RTU Communication according to the Modbus

RTU protocol.
using array programming. If this parameter is active, addresses
2810–2825 represent values of the 16 parameters. If this
parameter is not active, addresses 2810 and 2811 are used as
8-31 Address input-data-drive control word and bus reference. Addresses
Range: Function: 2812–2825 are reserved.
1* [ 0 - 247 ] Enter the address for the RS485 port. Valid range: Option: Function:
1–126 for FC-bus, or 1–247 for Modbus. [0] None
[1] [302] Minimum Reference
8-32 Baud Rate
[2] [303] Maximum Reference
Option: Function: [3] [341] Ramp 1 Ramp up
Select the baud rate for the RS485 port. time
[0] 2400 Baud [4] [342] Ramp 1 Ramp down
[1] 4800 Baud time
[2] 9600 Baud [5] [351] Ramp 2 Ramp up
[3] 19200 Baud time
[4] 38400 Baud [6] [352] Ramp 2 Ramp down
[5] 57600 Baud time

[6] 76800 Baud [7] [380] Jog Ramp Time

[7] 115200 Baud [8] [381] Quick Stop Time

[9] [412] Motor Speed Low
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Limit [Hz]
Option: Function: [10] [414] Motor Speed High
[0] * Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit Limit [Hz]
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit [11] [590] Digital & Relay Bus
[2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit Control

[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits [12] [676] Terminal 45 Output

Bus Control
8-35 Minimum Response Delay [13] [696] Terminal 42 Output
Range: Function: Bus Control
0.01 s* [ 0.0010 - 0.5 Specify the minimum delay time [15] FC Port CTW
s] between receiving a request and [16] FC Port REF
transmitting a response. This is used for [18] [311] Jog Speed [Hz]
overcoming modem turn-around [19] [427] Torque limit bus
delays. control
[20] [428] Speed limit bus
8-36 Maximum Response Delay control
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0.1 - 10.0 Specify the maximum allowed delay
s] time between receiving a request and
transmitting the response. If this time
is exceeded, no response is returned.

78 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

8-43 PCD Read Configuration 8-43 PCD Read Configuration

Select the parameters to be assigned to the PCDs of the Select the parameters to be assigned to the PCDs of the
telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. PCDs contain the actual data values of the telegram type. PCDs contain the actual data values of the
selected parameters. selected parameters.
Enter up to 16 different preset mapping 0-15 in this parameter, Enter up to 16 different preset mapping 0-15 in this parameter,
using array programming. If this parameter is active, addresses using array programming. If this parameter is active, addresses
2910–2925 represent values of the 16 parameters. If this 2910–2925 represent values of the 16 parameters. If this
parameter is not active, addresses 2910 and 2911 are used as
status word register and main actual value. Addresses 2912–2925
parameter is not active, addresses 2910 and 2911 are used as
status word register and main actual value. Addresses 2912–2925 4 4
are reserved. are reserved.
Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] None [43] [1617] Speed [RPM]
[1] [1500] Operation Hours [44] [1666] Digital Output
[2] [1501] Running Hours
[3] [1502] kWh Counter 4.9.5 8-5* Digital/Bus
[4] [1600] Control Word
[5] [1601] Reference [Unit] Parameters for configuring the control word merging.
[6] [1602] Reference %
[7] [1603] Status Word
NOTICE
[8] [1605] Main Actual Value [%]
These parameters are active only when
[9] [1609] Custom Readout
parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
[10] [1610] Power [kW]
word.
[11] [1611] Power [hp]
[12] [1612] Motor Voltage
8-50 Coasting Select
[13] [1613] Frequency
[14] [1614] Motor Current Option: Function:
[15] [1615] Frequency [%] Select control of the coasting function via the
[16] [1616] Torque [Nm] terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.
[17] [1618] Motor Thermal [0] Digital Activate coasting command via a digital input.
[18] [1630] DC Link Voltage input
[19] [1634] Heatsink Temp. [1] Bus Activate coasting command via the serial
[20] [1635] Inverter Thermal communication port or fieldbus option.
[21] [1638] SL Controller State [2] Logic AND Activate coasting command via the fieldbus/
[22] [1650] External Reference serial communication port and 1 extra digital
[23] [1652] Feedback [Unit] input.
[24] [1660] Digital Input
[3] * Logic OR Activate coasting command via the fieldbus/
18,19,27,33
serial communication port or via 1 of the
[25] [1661] Terminal 53 Switch
digital inputs.
Setting
[26] [1662] Analog input 53
8-51 Quick Stop Select
[27] [1663] Terminal 54 Switch
Option: Function:
Setting
[0] Digital Activate quick stop command via a digital
[28] [1664] Analog input 54
input input.
[29] [1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
[30] [1671] Relay output [1] Bus Activate quick stop command via the serial
[31] [1672] Counter A communication port or fieldbus option.
[32] [1673] Counter B [2] Logic AND Activate quick stop command via the fieldbus/
[33] [1690] Alarm Word serial communication port and additionally via
[34] [1692] Warning Word 1 of the digital inputs.
[35] [1694] Ext. Status Word
[3] * Logic OR Activate quick stop command via the fieldbus/
[38] [1622] Torque [%]
serial communication port or via 1 of the
[41] [1657] Feedback [RPM] digital inputs.
[42] [1679] Analog Output 45
[mA]

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 79

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

8-52 DC Brake Select 8-55 Set-up Select

Option: Function: Select the trigger for the set-up selection.
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals Option: Function:
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. [2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
NOTICE digital input trigger the set-up selection.

When parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is [3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
set to [1] PM non-salient SPM, only digital input triggers the set-up selection.

4 4
selection [0] Digital input is available.
8-56 Preset Reference Select
[0] Digital Activate DC brake command via a digital input. Option: Function:
input Select the trigger for the preset reference
[1] Bus Activate DC brake command via the serial selection.
communication port or fieldbus option.
[0] Digital A digital input triggers the preset reference
[2] Logic Activate DC brake command via the fieldbus/ input selection.
AND serial communication port and additionally via 1
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus
of the digital inputs.
triggers the preset reference selection.
[3] * Logic OR Activate DC brake command via the fieldbus/
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
serial communication port or via 1 of the digital
digital input trigger the preset reference
inputs.
selection.

8-53 Start Select [3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a

digital input triggers the preset reference
Select the trigger for the start function.
selection.
Option: Function:
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the start function. 8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus Select control of the frequency converter OFF2 selection via the
triggers the start function. terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
digital input trigger the start function.
PROFIdrive profile.
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
Option: Function:
digital input triggers the start function.
[0] Digital input
8-54 Reversing Select [1] Bus
[2] Logic AND
Option: Function:
[3] * Logic OR
Select the trigger for the reversing function.

[0] Digital A digital input triggers the reversing function. 8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select
input Select control of the frequency converter OFF3 selection via the
[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is
triggers the reversing function. active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
and ctrl. word, and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
[2] Logic AND The fieldbus/serial communication port and a
PROFIdrive profile.
digital input trigger the reversing function.
Option: Function:
[3] * Logic OR The fieldbus/serial communication port or a
[0] Digital input
digital input triggers the reversing function.
[1] Bus
[2] Logic AND
8-55 Set-up Select
[3] * Logic OR
Select the trigger for the set-up selection.
Option: Function:
[0] Digital input A digital input triggers the set-up selection.

[1] Bus A serial communication port or the fieldbus

triggers the set-up selection.

80 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.9.6 8-7* Protocol SW Version 4.9.8 8-9* Bus Feedback

8-79 Protocol Firmware version Use the parameter group to configure the bus feedback.
Range: Function: 8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
Size related* [0 - 655 ] Firmware revision: FC is in index 0; Range: Function:
Modbus is in index 1; indexes 2–4 are
100 RPM* [ 0 - 1500 Enter the jog speed. This is a fixed
reserved.
RPM] jog speed activated via the serial

4 4
port or fieldbus option.
4.9.7 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
These parameters are used for monitoring the bus Range: Function:
communication via the frequency converter port. 200 RPM* [ 0 - 1500 Enter the jog speed. This value is a
RPM] fixed jog speed activated via the
8-80 Bus Message Count
serial port or fieldbus option.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of 4.10 Parameters: 9-** PROFIdrive
valid telegrams detected on the bus.
For more information about PROFIBUS parameter
8-81 Bus Error Count descriptions, see the VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360
Range: Function: PROFIBUS DP Programming Guide.
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of
telegrams with faults (for example CRC For more information about PROFINET parameter
faults) detected on the bus. descriptions, see the VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360
PROFINET Programming Guide.
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 9-00 Setpoint
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of
0* [0 - This parameter receives cyclic reference from a
valid telegrams sent by the frequency
65535 ] master class 2. If the control priority is set to
converter to the slave.
master class 2, the reference for the frequency
converter is taken from this parameter, whereas
8-83 Slave Error Count
the cyclic reference is ignored.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of 9-07 Actual Value
error telegrams, which could not be Range: Function:
executed by the frequency converter.
0* [0 - 65535 ] This parameter delivers the MAV for a master
class 2. The parameter is valid if the control
8-84 Slave Messages Sent
priority is set to master class 2.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of 9-15 PCD Write Configuration
messages sent from the slave. Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3–10 of the
telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the
8-85 Slave Timeout Errors telegram type. Values in PCD 3–10 are written to the selected
Range: Function: parameters as data. For standard PROFIBUS telegrams, see
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This parameter shows the number of parameter 9-22 Telegram Selection.
slave timeout errors. Option: Function:
[0] None
8-88 Reset FC port Diagnostics [302] Minimum Reference
Option: Function: [303] Maximum Reference
[0] * Do not reset Do not reset all FC port diagnostic counters. [311] Jog Speed [Hz]

[1] Reset counter Reset all FC port diagnostic counters. [312] Catch up/slow Down Value
[341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
[342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
[351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
[352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 81

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

9-15 PCD Write Configuration 9-16 PCD Read Configuration

Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3–10 of the Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3–10 of the
telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. Values in PCD 3–10 are written to the selected telegram type. Values in PCD 3–10 contain the actual data values
parameters as data. For standard PROFIBUS telegrams, see of the selected parameters.
parameter 9-22 Telegram Selection. Option: Function:
Option: Function: [1502] kWh Counter
[380] Jog Ramp Time [1600] Control Word
4 4 [381]
[412]
Quick Stop Ramp Time
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
[1601] Reference [Unit]
[1602] Reference [%]
[414] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] [1603] Status Word
[416] Torque Limit Motor Mode [1605] Main Actual Value [%]
[417] Torque Limit Generator Mode [1609] Custom Readout
[427] Torque Limit Bus Control [1610] Power [kW]
[428] Speed Limit Bus Control [1611] Power [hp]
[553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value [1612] Motor Voltage
[558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value [1613] Frequency
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control [1614] Motor current
[593] Pulse Out 27 Bus Control [1615] Frequency [%]
[595] Pulse Out 29 Bus Control [1616] Torque [Nm]
[615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. [1617] Speed [RPM]
Value [1618] Motor Thermal
[625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. [1622] Torque [%]
Value [1630] DC Link Voltage
[676] Terminal 45 Output Bus Control [1633] Brake Energy /2 min
[696] Terminal 42 Output Bus Control [1634] Heatsink Temp.
[733] Process PID Proportional Gain [1635] Inverter Thermal
[734] Process PID Integral Time [1638] SL Controller State
[735] Process PID Differentiation Time [1639] Control Card Temp.
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1650] External Reference
[890] Bus Jog 1 Speed [1652] Feedback[Unit]
[891] Bus Jog 2 Speed [1653] Digi Pot Reference
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 [1657] Feedback [RPM]
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 [1660] Digital Input
[3401] PCD 1 Write For Application [1661] Terminal 53 Setting
[3402] PCD 2 Write For Application [1662] Analog input 53
[3403] PCD 3 Write For Application [1663] Terminal 54 Setting
[3404] PCD 4 Write For Application [1664] Analog input 54
[3405] PCD 5 Write For Application [1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
[3406] PCD 6 Write For Application [1666] Digital Output
[3407] PCD 7 Write For Application [1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
[3408] PCD 8 Write For Application [1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
[3409] PCD 9 Write For Application [1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
[3410] PCD 10 Write For Application [1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz]
[1671] Relay output
9-16 PCD Read Configuration
[1672] Counter A
Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3–10 of the
[1673] Counter B
telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the
[1679] Analog output 45 [mA]
telegram type. Values in PCD 3–10 contain the actual data values
[1684] Comm. Option STW
of the selected parameters.
[1685] FC Port CTW 1
Option: Function:
[1690] Alarm Word
[0] None
[1691] Alarm Word 2
[1500] Operating hours
[1692] Warning Word
[1501] Running Hours
[1693] Warning Word 2

82 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

9-16 PCD Read Configuration 9-23 Parameters for Signals

Select the parameters to be assigned to PCD 3–10 of the Option: Function:
telegrams. The number of available PCDs depends on the [0] * None
telegram type. Values in PCD 3–10 contain the actual data values [302] Minimum Reference
of the selected parameters. [303] Maximum Reference
Option: Function: [311] Jog Speed [Hz]
[1694] Ext. Status Word [312] Catch up/slow Down Value
[1695] Ext. Status Word 2 [341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
[1697] Alarm Word 3 [342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time 4 4
[3421] PCD 1 Read For Application [351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
[3422] PCD 2 Read For Application [352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
[3423] PCD 3 Read For Application [380] Jog Ramp Time
[3424] PCD 4 Read For Application [381] Quick Stop Ramp Time
[3425] PCD 5 Read For Application [412] Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
[3426] PCD 6 Read For Application [414] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
[3427] PCD 7 Read For Application [416] Torque Limit Motor Mode
[3428] PCD 8 Read For Application [417] Torque Limit Generator Mode
[3429] PCD 9 Read For Application [427] Torque Limit Bus Control
[3430] PCD 10 Read For Application [428] Speed Limit Bus Control
[3450] Actual Position [553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[3456] Track Error [558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control
9-18 Node Address
[593] Pulse Out 27 Bus Control
Range: Function: [595] Pulse Out 29 Bus Control
126* [1 - Enter the station address in this parameter or, [615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
126 ] alternatively, in the hardware switch. To adjust the [625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
station address in parameter 9-18 Node Address, [676] Terminal 45 Output Bus Control
set the hardware switch to 126 or 127 (that is all
[696] Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
switches set to on). Otherwise, this parameter
[733] Process PID Proportional Gain
shows the actual setting of the switch.
[734] Process PID Integral Time
[735] Process PID Differentiation Time
9-19 Drive Unit System Number
[748] PCD Feed Forward
Range: Function:
[890] Bus Jog 1 Speed
1037* [0 - 65535 ] Manufacturer specific system ID.
[891] Bus Jog 2 Speed
[1500] Operating hours
9-22 Telegram Selection
[1501] Running Hours
Select a standard PROFIBUS telegram configuration for the [1502] kWh Counter
frequency converter as an alternative to the freely configurable
[1600] Control Word
telegrams in parameter 9-15 PCD Write Configuration and
[1601] Reference [Unit]
parameter 9-16 PCD Read Configuration.
[1602] Reference [%]
Option: Function: [1603] Status Word
[1] Standard telegram 1 [1605] Main Actual Value [%]
[100] * None [1609] Custom Readout
[101] PPO 1 [1610] Power [kW]
[102] PPO 2 [1611] Power [hp]
[103] PPO 3 [1612] Motor Voltage
[104] PPO 4 [1613] Frequency
[105] PPO 5 [1614] Motor current
[106] PPO 6 [1615] Frequency [%]
[107] PPO 7 [1616] Torque [Nm]
[108] PPO 8 [1617] Speed [RPM]
[200] Custom telegram 1 [1618] Motor Thermal
[1622] Torque [%]
[1630] DC Link Voltage

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 83

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

9-23 Parameters for Signals 9-23 Parameters for Signals

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [3428] PCD 8 Read For Application
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3429] PCD 9 Read For Application
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3430] PCD 10 Read For Application
[1638] SL Controller State [3450] Actual Position
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3456] Track Error
[1650] External Reference
4 4 [1652] Feedback[Unit]
9-27 Parameter Edit
Option: Function:
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
[1657] Feedback [RPM] Parameters can be edited via PROFIBUS, the
[1660] Digital Input standard RS485 interface, or the LCP.
[1661] Terminal 53 Setting [0] Disabled Disable editing via PROFIBUS.
[1662] Analog input 53
[1] * Enabled Enable editing via PROFIBUS.
[1663] Terminal 54 Setting
[1664] Analog input 54 9-28 Process Control
[1665] Analog output 42 [mA]
Option: Function:
[1666] Digital Output
Process control (setting of control word, speed
[1667] Pulse input 29 [Hz]
reference, and process data) is possible via either
[1668] Pulse input 33 [Hz]
PROFIBUS or standard fieldbus, but not both
[1669] Pulse output 27 [Hz]
simultaneously. Local control is always possible via
[1670] Pulse output 29 [Hz] the LCP. Control via process control is possible via
[1671] Relay output either terminals or fieldbus depending on the
[1672] Counter A settings in parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to
[1673] Counter B parameter 8-56 Preset Reference Select.
[1679] Analog output 45 [mA]
[0] Disable Disables process control via PROFIBUS master
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
class 1 and enables process control via standard
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1
fieldbus or PROFIBUS master class 2.
[1684] Comm. Option STW
[1] Enable Enables process control via PROFIBUS master class
[1685] FC Port CTW 1
* cyclic 1 and disables process control via standard
[1690] Alarm Word
master fieldbus or PROFIBUS master class 2.
[1691] Alarm Word 2
[1692] Warning Word
9-44 Fault Message Counter
[1693] Warning Word 2
Range: Function:
[1694] Ext. Status Word
0* [0 - Indicates the number of fault events presently
[1695] Ext. Status Word 2
65535 ] stored in parameter 9-45 Fault Code. The buffer
[1697] Alarm Word 3
capacity is maximum 8 error events. The buffer
[3401] PCD 1 Write For Application
and counter are set to 0 by reset or power-up.
[3402] PCD 2 Write For Application
[3403] PCD 3 Write For Application
9-45 Fault Code
[3404] PCD 4 Write For Application
Range: Function:
[3405] PCD 5 Write For Application
0* [0 - 0 ] This buffer contains the alarm word for all alarms
[3406] PCD 6 Write For Application
and warnings that have occurred since last reset or
[3407] PCD 7 Write For Application
power-up. The buffer capacity is maximum 8 error
[3408] PCD 8 Write For Application
events.
[3409] PCD 9 Write For Application
[3410] PCD 10 Write For Application
9-47 Fault Number
[3421] PCD 1 Read For Application
Range: Function:
[3422] PCD 2 Read For Application
0* [0 - 0 ] This buffer contains the alarm word for all alarms
[3423] PCD 3 Read For Application
and warnings that have occurred since last reset or
[3424] PCD 4 Read For Application
power-up. The buffer capacity is maximum 8 error
[3425] PCD 5 Read For Application
events.
[3426] PCD 6 Read For Application
[3427] PCD 7 Read For Application

84 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

9-52 Fault Situation Counter 9-64 Device Identification

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 1000 ] Indicates the number of fault events that have 0* [0 - NOTICE
occurred since last reset or power-up. 0]
This parameter is not visible via LCP.

9-53 Profibus Warning Word

The device identification parameter. The data type is
Range: Function: array [n] of unsigned16. The assignment of the 1st
0* [0 - This parameter shows PROFIBUS communication
4 4
subindexes is defined and shown in Table 4.9.
65535 ] warnings.
Index Content Value
Bit Description 0 Manufacturer 128
0 Connection with DP master is lost. 1 Device type 1
1 Not used. 2 Version xxyy
2 FDL (fieldbus data link layer) is not 3 Firmware date year yyyy
OK. 4 Firmware date ddmm
3 Clear data command received. month
4 Actual value is not updated. 5 No. of axes Variable
5 Baud rate search. 6 Vendor specific: PB xxyy
6 PROFIBUS ASIC is not transmitting. Version
7 Initializing of PROFIBUS is not OK. 7 Vendor specific: xxyy
8 Frequency converter is tripped. Database Version
9 Internal CAN error. 8 Vendor specific: xxyy
10 Wrong configuration data from PLC. AOC Version
11 Wrong ID sent by PLC. 9 Vendor specific: xxyy
12 Internal fault occurred. MOC Version
13 Not configured.
14 Timeout active. Table 4.9 Device Identification 1st Subindex
Assignment
15 Warning 34 active.

Table 4.8 Bit Definition

9-65 Profile Number
Range: Function:
9-63 Actual Baud Rate 0* [0 - 0 ] NOTICE
Option: Function:
This parameter is not visible via LCP.
This parameter shows the actual
PROFIBUS baud rate. The PROFIBUS
This parameter contains the profile identification.
master automatically sets the baud
Byte 1 contains the profile number and byte 2 the
rate.
version number of the profile.
[0] 9,6 kbit/s
[1] 19,2 kbit/s 9-67 Control Word 1
[2] 93,75 kbit/s Range: Function:
[3] 187,5 kbit/s 0* [0 - 65535 ] This parameter accepts the control word from a
[4] 500 kbit/s master class 2 in the same format as PCD 1.
[6] 1500 kbit/s
[7] 3000 kbit/s 9-68 Status Word 1
[8] 6000 kbit/s Range: Function:
[9] 12000 kbit/s 0* [0 - 65535 ] This parameter delivers the status word for a
[10] 31,25 kbit/s master class 2 in the same format as PCD 2.
[11] 45,45 kbit/s
[255] * No baudrate found 9-70 Edit Set-up
Option: Function:
Select the set-up in which programming
(change of data) is performed during operation.
It is possible to program the 2 set-ups

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 85

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

9-70 Edit Set-up 9-81 Defined Parameters (2)

Option: Function: Range: Function:
independently of the set-up selected as active 0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the defined
set-up. Parameter access from each master is frequency converter parameters.
directed to the set-up selected by the
individual master (cyclic, acyclic MCL1, 1st 9-82 Defined Parameters (3)
acyclic MCL2, 2nd acyclic MCL2, 3rd acyclic Range: Function:
MCL2). 0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the defined
4 4 [1] Set-up 1 frequency converter parameters.
[2] Set-up 2
[9] * Active Set- 9-83 Defined Parameters (4)
up Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the defined
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values
frequency converter parameters.
Option: Function:
Parameter values changed via RS485 are not 9-84 Defined Parameters (5)
automatically stored in a non-volatile memory. Range: Function:
Use this parameter to activate a function that
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the defined
stores parameter values in the EEPROM non-
frequency converter parameters.
volatile memory, so changed parameter values
are retained at power-down.
9-85 Defined Parameters (6)
[0] * Off Deactivates the non-volatile storage function. Range: Function:
[1] Store all Stores all parameter values in the set-up selected 0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the defined
setups in parameter 9-70 Edit Set-up in the non-volatile frequency converter parameters.
memory. The selection returns to [0] Off when all
values are stored. 9-90 Changed Parameters (1)
Range: Function:
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the frequency
Option: Function: converter parameters deviating from default
NOTICE setting.

Resets the VLT® PROFIBUS DP MCA

9-91 Changed Parameters (2)
101 option only.
Range: Function:
[0] * No action 0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the frequency
[1] Power-on reset Resets the frequency converter after converter parameters deviating from default
power-up, as for power cycle. setting.

[2] Power-on reset 9-92 Changed Parameters (3)

prep
Range: Function:
[3] Comm option When reset, the frequency converter
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the frequency
reset disappears from the fieldbus, which may
converter parameters deviating from default
cause a communication error from the
setting.
master.

9-75 DO Identification 9-93 Changed Parameters (4)

Range: Function: Range: Function:

0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the frequency
0* [0 - 65535 ] Provides information about the DO (drive
converter parameters deviating from default
object). This parameter is for PROFINET only.
setting.
9-80 Defined Parameters (1)
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the defined
frequency converter parameters.

86 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

9-94 Changed Parameters (5) 12-04 DHCP Server

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter shows a list of all the frequency Read-only. Shows the IP address of the
converter parameters deviating from default found DHCP or BOOTP server.
setting.
12-05 Lease Expires
9-99 Profibus Revision Counter Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Read-only. Shows the lease time left for
0* [0 - 65535 ] Readout of revision count. the current DHCP-assigned IP address. 4 4
4.11 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet 12-06 Name Servers
Range: Function:
For more information about Ethernet parameter
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] IP addresses of domain name servers.
descriptions, see the VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360
Can be automatically assigned when
PROFINET Programming Guide.
using DHCP.

4.11.1 12-0* IP Settings 12-07 Domain Name

Range: Function:
12-00 IP Address Assignment
0* [1 - 48 ] Domain name of the attached network. Can be
Option: Function: automatically assigned when using DHCP network.
Select the IP address assignment method.
[0] MANUAL IP address can be set in parameter 12-01 IP 12-08 Host Name
Address. Range: Function:
[1] DHCP IP address is assigned via DHCP server. 0* [1 - 48 ] Logical (given) name of option.
[2] BOOTP IP address is assigned via BOOTP server.
[10] * DCP DCP is assigned via the DCP protocol. 12-09 Physical Address

12-01 IP Address Range: Function:

0* [0 - 17 ] Read-only. Shows the physical (MAC) address of
Range: Function:
the option.
0* [0 - Configure the IP address of the option.
4294967295 ] Read-only if parameter 12-00 IP Address
Assignment is set to [1] DHCP, [2] BOOTP, 4.11.2 12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
or via DIP switches.

12-10 Link Status

12-02 Subnet Mask
Option: Function:
Range: Function:
[0] * No Link
0* [0 - Configure the IP subnet mask of the
[1] Link Shows the link status of the Ethernet ports.
4294967295 ] option. Read-only if parameter 12-00 IP
Address Assignment is set to [1] DHCP or
12-11 Link Duration
[2] BOOTP.
Range: Function:
12-03 Default Gateway Size related* [ 0 - 0 ] Shows the duration of the present link
on each port in dd:hh:mm:ss.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - Configure the IP default gateway of the
12-12 Auto Negotiation
4294967295 ] option. Read-only if parameter 12-00 IP
Address Assignment set to [1] DHCP or [2]
Option: Function:
BOOTP. Configures auto negotiation of Ethernet link
parameters, for each port: ON or OFF.
12-04 DHCP Server [0] Off Link speed and link duplex can be configured in
Range: Function: parameter 12-13 Link Speed and parameter 12-14 Link
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] NOTICE Duplex.

A power cycle is necessary after [1] * On

setting the IP parameters manually.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 87

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

12-13 Link Speed 12-90 Cable Diagnostic

Option: Function: Option: Function:
Forces the link speed for each port in 10 Mbps setting [0] Disable after the diagnostics have
or 100 Mbps. If parameter 12-12 Auto Negotiation finished.
is set to [1] On, this parameter is read-only and
shows the actual link speed. If no link is present,
NOTICE
None is shown.
The cable diagnostics function is only
issued on ports where there is no link (see
[0] * None parameter 12-10 Link Status).
4 4 [1] 10 Mbps
[2] 100
[0] * Disabled
Mbps
[1] Enabled
12-14 Link Duplex
12-91 Auto Cross Over
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
Forces the duplex for each port to full or half
duplex. If parameter 12-12 Auto Negotiation is
NOTICE
set to [1] On, this parameter is read-only. Disabling of the auto-crossover function
requires crossed Ethernet cables for daisy-
[0] Half Duplex
chaining the options.
[1] * Full Duplex

[0] Disabled Disables the auto-crossover function.

4.11.3 12-8* Other Ethernet Services
[1] * Enabled Enables the auto-crossover function.

12-80 FTP Server 12-92 IGMP Snooping

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[0] Disabled
[1] Enabled
[1] * Enabled
12-81 HTTP Server 12-93 Cable Error Length
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * Disabled
0* [0 - If cable diagnostics is enabled in
[1] Enabled 65535 ] parameter 12-90 Cable Diagnostic, the built-in
switch is possible via time domain reflectometry
12-82 SMTP Service
(TDR). This is a measurement technique which
Option: Function:
detects common cabling problems such as open
[0] * Disabled circuits, short circuits, and impedance mismatches
[1] Enabled or breaks in transmission cables. The distance from
the option to the error is shown in meters with an
12-89 Transparent Socket Channel Port
accuracy of ±2 m (6.6 ft). The value 0 means no
Range: Function: errors detected.
4000* [0 - 65535 ] Configures the TCP port number for the
transient socket channel. This enables FC 12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection
telegrams to be sent transiently on Ethernet
Range: Function:
via TCP. Default value is 4000. 0 indicates
-1 % [-1 - The built-in switch is capable of protecting the
disabled.
* 20 %] switch system from receiving too many broadcast
packages, which can use up network resources. The
4.11.4 12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services value indicates a percentage of the total
bandwidth that is allowed for broadcast messages.

12-90 Cable Diagnostic Example:

Option: Function: OFF means that the filter is disabled - all broadcast
messages are passed through. The value 0% means
Enables/disables advanced cable diagnosis
that no broadcast messages are passed through. A
function. If enabled, the distance to cable errors
value of 10% means that 10% of the total
can be read out in parameter 12-93 Cable Error
bandwidth is allowed for broadcast messages. If
Length. The parameter resumes to the default

88 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection

Range: Function:
the amount of broadcast messages exceeds the
10% threshold, they are blocked.

12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter

Applies to parameter 12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection, if the
broadcast storm protection also includes multicast telegrams.
Option: Function: 4 4
[0] * Broadcast only
[1] Broadcast & Multicast

12-96 Port Config

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal
[1] Mirror Port 1 to 2
[2] Mirror Port 2 to 1
[10] Port 1 disabled
[11] Port 2 disabled
[254] Mirror Int. Port to 1
[255] Mirror Int. Port to 2

12-98 Interface Counters

Range: Function:
4000* [0 - Read-only.
4294967295 ] Advanced interface counters from a
built-in switch can be used for low-
level troubleshooting. The parameter
shows a sum of port 1 + port 2.

12-99 Media Counters

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Read-only.
Advanced interface counters from a built-
in switch can be used for low-level
troubleshooting. The parameter shows a
sum of port 1 + port 2.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 89

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

4.12 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control

Smart logic control (SLC) is a sequence of user-defined Start

130BA062.14
event P13-01
actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action) executed
by the SLC when the associated user-defined event (see State 1
13-51.0
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is evaluated as true by 13-52.0 State 2
Stop 13-51.1
the SLC. event P13-02 13-52.1

The condition for an event can be a particular status, or Stop

event P13-02
that the output from a logic rule or a comparator operand
4 4
State 4
13-51.3
becomes true. That leads to an associated action as 13-52.3
State 3
illustrated: 13-51.2
13-52.2

Par. 13-51 Par. 13-52

130BB671.13
Stop
SL Controller Event SL Controller Action event P13-02
Illustration 4.26 Events and Actions
Running Coast
Warning Start timer
Torque limit Set Do X low
Digital input X 30/2 Select set-up 2 Starting and stopping the SLC
... ... Start and stop the SLC by selecting [1] On or [0] Off in
parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The SLC always starts
Par. 13-43
Logic Rule Operator 2 in state 0 (where it evaluates event [0]). The SLC starts
when the Start Event (defined in parameter 13-01 Start
Event) is evaluated as true (provided that [1] On is selected
in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode). The SLC stops when
...
the stop event (parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is true.
...
Parameter 13-03 Reset SLC resets all SLC parameters and
Par. 13-11 starts programming from scratch.
Comparator Operator
NOTICE
= SLC is only active in auto-on mode, not hand-on mode.
TRUE longer than..

...
... 4.12.1 13-0* SLC Settings

Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate, and reset the

Illustration 4.25 Smart Logic Control (SLC)
smart logic control sequence. The logic functions and
comparators are always running in the background, which
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.
Events and actions are each numbered and linked in pairs
(states). This means that when the 1st event is fulfilled 13-00 SL Controller Mode
(becomes true), the 1st action is executed. After this, the Option: Function:
conditions of the 2nd event are evaluated and if evaluated [0] * Off Disable the smart logic controller.
true, the 2nd action is executed, and so on. Only 1 event is [1] On Enable the smart logic controller.
evaluated at any time. If an event is evaluated as false,
nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan 13-01 Start Event
interval and no other events are evaluated. This means
Option: Function:
that when the SLC starts, it evaluates the 1st event (and
[0] False
only the 1st event) in each scan interval. Only when the 1st
[1] True
event is evaluated true, the SLC executes the 1st action and
[2] Running
starts evaluating the 2nd event. It is possible to program 1–
[3] In range
20 events and actions.
[4] On reference
When the last event/action has been executed, the
[7] Out of current range
sequence starts over again from the 1st event/action.
[8] Below I low
Illustration 4.26 shows an example with 3 events/actions:
[9] Above I high
[16] Thermal warning
[17] Mains out of range
[18] Reversing

90 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-01 Start Event 13-02 Stop Event

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[19] Warning [34] Digital input DI19
[20] Alarm (trip) [35] Digital input DI27
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [36] Digital input DI29
[22] Comparator 0 [39] Start command
[23] Comparator 1 [40] * Drive stopped
[24] Comparator 2 [42] Auto Reset Trip
[25] Comparator 3 [50] Comparator 4 4 4
[26] Logic rule 0 [51] Comparator 5
[27] Logic rule 1 [60] Logic rule 4
[28] Logic rule 2 [61] Logic rule 5
[29] Logic rule 3 [70] SL Time-out 3
[33] Digital input DI18 [71] SL Time-out 4
[34] Digital input DI19 [72] SL Time-out 5
[35] Digital input DI27 [73] SL Time-out 6
[36] Digital input DI29 [74] SL Time-out 7
[39] * Start command [83] Broken Belt
[40] Drive stopped
13-03 Reset SLC
[42] Auto Reset Trip
[50] Comparator 4 Option: Function:
[51] Comparator 5 [0] * Do not reset Retain programmed settings in parameter
[60] Logic rule 4 SLC group 13-** Smart Logic.
[61] Logic rule 5 [1] Reset SLC Reset all parameters in parameter group 13-
[83] Broken Belt ** Smart Logic to default settings.

13-02 Stop Event

Option: Function: 4.12.2 13-1* Comparators
[0] False
[1] True
Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables
(that is output frequency, output current, analog input, and
[2] Running
so on.) to fixed preset values.
[3] In range
[4] On reference
Par. 13-11

130BB672.10
[7] Out of current range Comparator Operator
[8] Below I low Par. 13-10
Comparator Operand
[9] Above I high
=
[16] Thermal warning
Par. 13-12 TRUE longer than.
[17] Mains out of range Comparator Value ...
[18] Reversing ...
[19] Warning
Illustration 4.27 Comparators
[20] Alarm (trip)
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
There are digital values that are compared to fixed time
values. See explanation in parameter 13-10 Comparator
[24] Comparator 2
Operand. Comparators are evaluated once in each scan
[25] Comparator 3
interval. Use the result (true or false) directly. All
[26] Logic rule 0
parameters in this parameter group are array parameters
[27] Logic rule 1
with index 0 to 5. Select index 0 to program comparator 0,
[28] Logic rule 2 select index 1 to program comparator 1, and so on.
[29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Time-out 0 13-10 Comparator Operand
[31] SL Time-out 1 Option: Function:
[32] SL Time-out 2 [0] * Disabled
[33] Digital input DI18 [1] Reference %

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 91

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

13-10 Comparator Operand until the timer value entered in this parameter has elapsed.
Option: Function: Then it becomes true again.
All parameters in this parameter group are array
[2] Feedback %
parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
[3] Motor speed
timer 0, select index 1 to program timer 1, and so on.
[4] Motor Current
[6] Motor power 13-20 SL Controller Timer
[7] Motor voltage Range: Function:
[8] DC-link voltage 0 s* [0 - 3600 Enter the value to define the duration of the
4 4 [12] Analog input AI53 s] false output from the programmed timer. A
[13] Analog input AI54 timer is only false if it is started by an action
[18] Pulse input FI29 (for example [29] Start timer 1) and until the
[19] Pulse input FI33 given timer value has elapsed.
[20] Alarm number
[30] Counter A
4.12.4 13-4* Logic Rules
[31] Counter B

13-11 Comparator Operator Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (true/false inputs) from

timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits, and events
Option: Function:
using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
Select the operator to be used in the
boolean inputs for the calculation in parameter 13-40 Logic
comparison. This is an array parameter
Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and
containing comparator operators 0–5.
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. Define the operators
[0] Less Than (<) The result of the evaluation is true when the used to logically combine the selected inputs in
variable selected in parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.
smaller than the fixed value in
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value. The result Par. 13-41 Par. 13-43

130BB673.10
is false if the variable selected in Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2
Par. 13-40
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is Logic Rule Boolean 1
greater than the fixed value in Par. 13-42
Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value. ... ...
...
[1] Approx.Equal The result of the evaluation is true when the
* (~) variable speed selected in Par. 13-44
Logic Rule Boolean 3
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is
approximately equal to the fixed value in Illustration 4.28 Logic Rules
parameter 13-12 Comparator Value.

[2] Greater Than Inverse logic of [0] Less Than (<).

Priority of calculation
(>)
The results of parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
13-12 Comparator Value parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 are calculated first.
Range: Function:
The outcome (true/false) of this calculation is combined
0* [-9999 - Enter the trigger level for the variable that is
with the settings of parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
9999 ] monitored by this comparator. This is an
and parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3, yielding the final
array parameter containing comparator
result (true/false) of the logic rule.
values 0–5.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
Option: Function:
4.12.3 13-2* Timers
Select the 1st boolean (true or false)
Use the result (true or false) from timers directly to define input for the selected logic rule. See
an event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0]–[61])
boolean input in a logic rule (see parameter 13-40 Logic and parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70]–
Rule Boolean 1, parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, or [74]) for further description.
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3). A timer is only false [0] * False
when started by an action (for example [29] Start timer 1) [1] True
[2] Running

92 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[3] In range [3] AND NOT Evaluate the expression [13-40] AND NOT
[4] On reference [13-42].
[7] Out of current range [4] OR NOT Evaluate the expression [13-40] OR NOT
[8] Below I low [13-42].
[9] Above I high
[5] NOT AND Evaluate the expression NOT [13-40] AND
[16] Thermal warning
[17] Mains out of range
[6] NOT OR
[13-42].

Evaluate the expression NOT [13-40] OR

4 4
[18] Reversing
[19] Warning [13-42].

[20] Alarm (trip) [7] NOT AND Evaluate the expression NOT [13-40] AND
[21] Alarm (trip lock) NOT NOT [13-42].
[22] Comparator 0 [8] NOT OR Evaluate the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT
[23] Comparator 1 NOT [13-42].
[24] Comparator 2
[25] Comparator 3 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
[26] Logic rule 0 Option: Function:
[27] Logic rule 1
Select the 2nd boolean (true or false)
[28] Logic rule 2
input for the selected logic rule. See
[29] Logic rule 3
parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0]–[61]),
[30] SL Time-out 0 and parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70]–
[31] SL Time-out 1 [74]) for further description.
[32] SL Time-out 2
[0] * False
[33] Digital input DI18
[1] True
[34] Digital input DI19
[2] Running
[35] Digital input DI27
[3] In range
[36] Digital input DI29
[4] On reference
[39] Start command
[7] Out of current range
[40] Drive stopped
[8] Below I low
[42] Auto Reset Trip
[9] Above I high
[50] Comparator 4
[16] Thermal warning
[51] Comparator 5
[17] Mains out of range
[60] Logic rule 4
[18] Reversing
[61] Logic rule 5
[19] Warning
[70] SL Time-out 3
[20] Alarm (trip)
[71] SL Time-out 4
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[72] SL Time-out 5
[22] Comparator 0
[73] SL Time-out 6
[23] Comparator 1
[74] SL Time-out 7
[24] Comparator 2
[83] Broken Belt
[25] Comparator 3
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 [26] Logic rule 0
Option: Function: [27] Logic rule 1
[28] Logic rule 2
Select the 1st logical operator to use on the
boolean inputs from parameter 13-40 Logic [29] Logic rule 3
Rule Boolean 1 and parameter 13-42 Logic Rule [30] SL Time-out 0
Boolean 2. [31] SL Time-out 1
[32] SL Time-out 2
[0] * Disabled Ignore parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
[33] Digital input DI18
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and
[34] Digital input DI19
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[35] Digital input DI27
[1] AND Evaluate the expression [13-40] AND [13-42]. [36] Digital input DI29
[2] OR Evaluate the expression [13-40] OR [13-42]. [39] Start command

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 93

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[40] Drive stopped [0] * False
[42] Auto Reset Trip [1] True
[50] Comparator 4 [2] Running
[51] Comparator 5 [3] In range
[60] Logic rule 4 [4] On reference
[61] Logic rule 5 [7] Out of current range
4 4 [70] SL Time-out 3 [8] Below I low
[71] SL Time-out 4 [9] Above I high
[72] SL Time-out 5 [16] Thermal warning
[73] SL Time-out 6 [17] Mains out of range
[74] SL Time-out 7 [18] Reversing
[83] Broken Belt [19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
Option: Function: [22] Comparator 0
Select the 2nd logical operator to be used on [23] Comparator 1
the boolean input calculated in [24] Comparator 2
parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, [25] Comparator 3
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and [26] Logic rule 0
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and
[27] Logic rule 1
the boolean input coming from
[28] Logic rule 2
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[29] Logic rule 3
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
[30] SL Time-out 0
signifies the boolean input of
[31] SL Time-out 1
parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[32] SL Time-out 2
Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, and
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 signify [33] Digital input DI18
the boolean input calculated in [34] Digital input DI19
parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, [35] Digital input DI27
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and [36] Digital input DI29
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
[0] * Disabled Ignore parameter 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[42] Auto Reset Trip
[1] AND
[50] Comparator 4
[2] OR
[51] Comparator 5
[3] AND NOT
[60] Logic rule 4
[4] OR NOT
[61] Logic rule 5
[5] NOT AND
[70] SL Time-out 3
[6] NOT OR
[71] SL Time-out 4
[7] NOT AND
[72] SL Time-out 5
NOT
[73] SL Time-out 6
[8] NOT OR NOT
[74] SL Time-out 7
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 [83] Broken Belt

Option: Function:
Select the 3rd boolean (true or false)
4.12.5 13-5* States
input for the selected logic rule. See
parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, 13-51 SL Controller Event
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, Option: Function:
and parameter 13-42 Logic Rule
Select the 3rd boolean (true or false)
Boolean 2, and the boolean input.
input for the selected logic rule. See
See parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0]–
parameter 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
[61]), and parameter 13-02 Stop Event
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1,
([70]–[74]) for further description.

94 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-52 SL Controller Action

Option: Function: Option: Function:
parameter 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, [0] * Disabled Select the action corresponding to the SLC
and the boolean input. See event. Actions are executed when the
parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0]–[61]) corresponding event (defined in
and parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70]– parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is
[74]) for further description. evaluated as true.

[0] * False [1] No action

[1] True [2] Select set-up Changes the active set-up 4 4
[2] Running 1 (parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 1. If the set-
[3] In range up is changed, it merges with other set-up
[4] On reference commands coming from either the digital
[7] Out of current range inputs, or via a fieldbus.
[8] Below I low [3] Select set-up Changes the active set-up
[9] Above I high 2 (parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 2. If the set-
[16] Thermal warning up is changed, it merges with other set-up
[17] Mains out of range commands coming from either the digital
[18] Reversing inputs, or via a fieldbus.
[19] Warning [10] Select preset Select preset reference 0. If the active preset
[20] Alarm (trip) ref 0 reference is changed, it merges with other
[21] Alarm (trip lock) preset reference commands coming from
[22] Comparator 0 either the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
[23] Comparator 1
[11] Select preset Selects preset reference 1. If the active
[24] Comparator 2 ref 1 preset reference is changed, it merges with
[25] Comparator 3 other preset reference commands coming
[26] Logic rule 0 from either the digital inputs, or via a
[27] Logic rule 1 fieldbus.
[28] Logic rule 2
[12] Select preset Selects preset reference 2. If the active
[29] Logic rule 3
ref 2 preset reference is changed, it merges with
[30] SL Time-out 0
other preset reference commands coming
[31] SL Time-out 1 from either the digital inputs, or via a
[32] SL Time-out 2 fieldbus.
[33] Digital input DI18
[13] Select preset Selects preset reference 3. If the active
[34] Digital input DI19
ref 3 preset reference is changed, it merges with
[35] Digital input DI27
other preset reference commands coming
[36] Digital input DI29
from either the digital inputs, or via a
[39] Start command
fieldbus.
[40] Drive stopped
[14] Select preset Selects preset reference 4. If the active
[42] Auto Reset Trip
ref 4 preset reference is changed, it merges with
[50] Comparator 4
other preset reference commands coming
[51] Comparator 5
from either the digital inputs, or via a
[60] Logic rule 4
fieldbus.
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3 [15] Select preset Selects preset reference 5. If the active
ref 5 preset reference is changed, it merges with
[71] SL Time-out 4
other preset reference commands coming
[72] SL Time-out 5
from either the digital inputs, or via a
[73] SL Time-out 6
fieldbus.
[74] SL Time-out 7
[83] Broken Belt [16] Select preset Selects preset reference 6. If the active
ref 6 preset reference is changed, it merges with
other preset reference commands coming
from either the digital inputs, or via a
fieldbus.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 95

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

13-52 SL Controller Action 13-52 SL Controller Action

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[17] Select preset Selects preset reference 7. If the active [70] Start Timer 3 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for
ref 7 preset reference is changed, it merges with further description.
other preset reference commands coming
[71] Start Timer 4 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for
from either the digital inputs, or via a
further description.
fieldbus.
[72] Start Timer 5 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for
[18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1.
4 4 [19] Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2.
[73] Start Timer 6
further description.

See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for

[22] Run Issues a start command to the frequency further description.
converter.
[74] Start Timer 7 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for
[23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the further description.
frequency converter.

[24] Stop Issues a stop command to the frequency

4.13 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions
converter.
14-01 Switching Frequency
[25] Qstop Issues a quick stop command to the
Option: Function:
frequency converter.
Select the inverter switching frequency. Changing
[26] DC Brake Issues a DC-brake command to the the switching frequency helps to reduce acoustic
frequency converter. noise from the motor.
[27] Coast The frequency converter coasts immediately. [0] Ran3 3 kHz true random PWM (white noise
All stop commands including the coast modulation).
command stop the SLC.
[1] Ran5 5 kHz true random PWM (white noise
[28] Freeze output Freezes the output of the frequency modulation).
converter.
[2] 2.0 kHz
[29] Start timer 0 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for [3] 3.0 kHz
further description. [4] 4.0 kHz
[30] Start timer 1 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for [5] 5.0 kHz
further description. [6] 6.0 kHz
[7] 8.0 kHz
[31] Start timer 2 See parameter 13-20 SL Controller Timer for
further description. [8] 10.0 kHz
[9] 12.0 kHz
[32] Set digital Any output with SL output A is low.
[10] 16.0 kHz
out A low
[33] Set digital Any output with SL output B is low. 14-03 Overmodulation
out B low Option: Function:
[34] Set digital Any output with SL output C is low.
[0] Off To avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft, select [0]
out C low
Off for no overmodulation of the output voltage. This
[35] Set digital Any output with SL output D is low. feature may be useful for applications such as grinding
out D low machines.
[38] Set digital Any output with SL output A is high.
[1] * On Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation function
out A high
for the output voltage. Select this setting when it is
[39] Set digital Any output with SL output B is high.
required that the output voltage is >95% of the input
out B high
voltage (typical when running oversynchronously). The
[40] Set digital Any output with SL output C is high.
output voltage is increased according to the degree of
out C high
overmodulation.
[41] Set digital Any output with SL output D is high.
out D high NOTICE
[60] Reset Resets Counter A to zero. Overmodulation leads to increased torque
Counter A ripple as harmonics are increased.
[61] Reset Resets Counter B to zero.
Counter B

96 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

14-07 Dead Time Compensation Level 14-10 Mains Failure

Range: Function: Option: Function:
Size [0 - Level of applied deadtime compensation [0] No The frequency converter does not compensate for
related* 100 ] in percentage. A high level (>90%) * function a mains interruption. The voltage on the DC-link
optimizes the dynamic motor response; a drops quickly, and the motor is lost within
level 50–90% is good for both motor- milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock is the result.
torque-ripple minimization and the
[1] Ctrl. The frequency converter retains control of the
motor dynamics. A 0-level turns the
ramp- motor and does a controlled ramp down from
deadtime compensation off.
down parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level level. If 4 4
parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [0] Off or [2] AC
14-08 Damping Gain Factor
brake, the ramp follows the overvoltage ramping.
Range: Function: If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [1] Resistor
Size related* [0 - 100 %] Damping factor for DC-link voltage Brake, the ramp follows the setting in
compensation. parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. This
selection is useful in pump applications, where the
14-09 Dead Time Bias Current Level inertia is low and the friction is high. When mains
Range: Function: is restored, the output frequency ramps the motor
up to the reference speed (if the mains
Size related* [0 - 100 %] Set a bias signal (in [%]) to add to
interruption is prolonged, the controlled ramp
the current-sense signal for deadtime
down might take down the output frequency to 0
compensation.
RPM, and when the mains is restored, the
application is ramped up from 0 RPM to the
4.13.1 14-1* Mains On/Off previous reference speed via the normal ramp up).
If the energy in the DC-link disappears before the
Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and motor is ramped to 0, the motor is coasted.
handling. If a mains failure appears, the frequency [2] Ctrl. This selection is similar to selection [1] Ctrl. ramp-
converter tries to continue in a controlled way until the ramp- down, except that in [2] Ctrl. ramp-down, trip a
power in the DC link is exhausted. down, reset is necessary for starting up after power-up.
14-10 Mains Failure trip
[3] Coasting Centrifuges can run for an hour without power
Option: Function:
supply. In those situations, it is possible to select a
NOTICE coast function at mains interruption, together with
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure cannot be a flying start, which occurs when the mains is
changed while the motor is running. restored.

[4] Kinetic Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency

Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is typically used back-up converter keeps running as long as there is energy
where short mains interruptions (voltage dips) are in the system due to the inertia from motor and
present. At 100% load and a short voltage load. This is done by converting the mechanical
interruption, the DC voltage on the main energy to the DC-link and thereby maintaining
capacitors drops quickly. For larger frequency control of the frequency converter and motor. This
converters, it only takes a few milliseconds before can extend the controlled operation, depending
the DC level is down to about 373 V DC and the on the inertia in the system. For fans, it is typically
IGBTs cut off and lose control of the motor. When several seconds, for pumps up to 2 s and for
mains is restored, and the IGBTs start again, the compressors only for a fraction of a second. Many
output frequency and voltage vector do not industry applications can extend controlled
correspond to the speed/frequency of the motor, operation for many seconds, which is often
and the result is normally an overvoltage or enough time for the mains to return.
overcurrent, mostly resulting in a trip lock.
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure can be programmed
to avoid this situation.

Select the function to which the frequency

converter must act when the threshold in
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level has been
reached.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 97

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Option: Function: Option: Function:
The function is made so that it does not even

130BC918.10
A B C DE A
UDC [V] detect if mains return. This is the reason for the
UDC
relatively high level on the DC-link during ramp
14-11*1.35
n [RPM] t [S]
down.
Ref

130BC920.10
A B C D
UDC [V]

790 V

4 4 t [S]
UDC
14-11*1.35
A Normal operation n [RPM] t [S]

B Mains failure Ref

C Kinetic back-up
D Mains return 0
t [S]

E Normal operation: Ramping

A Normal operation

Illustration 4.29 Kinetic Back-up B Mains failure

C Kinetic back-up
D Trip
The DC-level during [4] Kinetic back-up is
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level x 1.35. Illustration 4.30 Kinetic Back-up Trip
If the mains does not return, UDC is maintained as
long as possible by ramping the speed down
towards 0 RPM. Finally, the frequency converter [6] Alarm
coasts. [7] Kin. Kinetic back-up with recovery combines the
If mains returns while in kinetic back-up, UDC back-up, features of kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
increases above parameter 14-11 Mains Fault trip w with trip. This feature makes it possible to select
Voltage Level x 1.35. This is detected in 1 of the recovery between kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up with
following ways: trip based on a recovery speed, which is config-
urable in parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip
• If UDC >parameter 14-11 Mains Fault
Voltage Level x 1.35 x 1.05 Recovery Level to enable detection of mains
returning. If the mains do not return, the
• If the speed is above the reference. This
frequency converter ramps down to 0 RPM and
is relevant if mains comes back at a
trips. If mains return while kinetic back-up is at a
lower level than before, for example,
speed above the value set in parameter 14-15 Kin.
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level
Back-up Trip Recovery Level, normal operation is
x 1.35 x 1.02. This does not fulfill the
resumed. This is equal to [4] Kinetic Back-up. The
criterion above, and the frequency
DC level during [7] Kinetic back-up is
converter tries to reduce UDC to
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level x 1.35. If
parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level
mains return while kinetic back-up is at a speed
x 1.35 by increasing the speed. This does
below parameter 14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery
not succeed as mains cannot be lowered.
Level, the frequency converter ramps down to 0
• If running motoric. The same mechanism RPM using the ramp and then trips.
as in the previous point, but where the
inertia prevents the speed from going 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level
above the reference speed. This leads to Range: Function:
the motor running motoric until the
342 [100 - This parameter defines the threshold voltage at
speed is above the reference speed, and
V* 800 V] which the selected function in
the above situation occurs. Instead of
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is activated. Based
waiting for that, the present criterion is
on the supply quality, consider to select 90% of
introduced.
the nominal mains as the detection level. For a
[5] Kinetic The difference between kinetic back-up with and supply of 380 V, parameter 14-11 Mains Fault
back-up, without trip is that the latter always ramps down Voltage Level should be set to 342 V. This results
trip to 0 RPM and trips, regardless of whether mains in a DC detection level of 462 V
return or not. (parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level x
1.35).

98 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance 4.13.2 14-2* Trip Reset

Option: Function:
Operation under severe mains imbalance
Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip
conditions reduces the lifetime of the motor.
handling, and control card self-test, or initialization.
Conditions are considered severe if the motor 14-20 Reset Mode
is operated continuously near nominal load (for
Option: Function:
example, a pump or fan running near full
speed). WARNING
[0] * Trip Trips the frequency converter. UNINTENDED START 4 4
[1] Warning Issues a warning. When the frequency converter is
connected to AC mains, DC supply,
[2] Disabled No action is taken.
or load sharing, the motor may
[3] Derate Derates the frequency converter. start at any time. Unintended start
during programming, service, or
[4] Fast Trip Enable the fast detection to trip the frequency
repair work can result in death,
converter. This option is related to
serious injury, or property damage.
parameter 14-17 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level and
The motor can start via an external
parameter 14-18 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min
switch, a fieldbus command, an
Power.
input reference signal from the LCP,
[5] Fast Enable the fast detection to issue a warning. or after a cleared fault condition.
Warning This option is related to parameter 14-17 Fast To prevent unintended motor start:
Mains Phase Loss Level and parameter 14-18 Fast
Mains Phase Loss Min Power.
• Disconnect the frequency
converter from the mains.
14-15 Kin. Back-up Trip Recovery Level • Press [Off/Reset] on the
Range: Function: LCP before programming
parameters.
Size related* [0 - 500.000 Reference- This parameter specifies
FeedbackUnit] the kinetic back-up trip • Fully wire and assemble
recovery level. the frequency converter,
motor, and any driven
14-17 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level equipment before
Range: Function: connecting the frequency
converter to AC mains, DC
300 % [0 - Set this parameter to a lower value makes the
supply, or load sharing.
* 500 %] detection more sensitive. Set this parameter to
a higher value is opposite. This parameter is
only active when parameter 14-12 Response to NOTICE
Mains Imbalance selects option [4] Fast Trip or
If the specified number of
[5] Fast Warning.
automatic resets is reached within
10 minutes, the frequency
14-18 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min Power
converter enters [0] Manual reset
Range: Function: mode. After the manual reset is
10 %* [0 - The fast detection does not activate if the performed, the setting of
100 %] actual power is lower than the percentage of parameter 14-20 Reset Mode reverts
parameter 14-18 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min Power to the original selection. If the
x PM,N. This parameter is only active when number of automatic resets is not
parameter 14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance reached within 10 minutes, or
selects option [4] Fast Trip or [5] Fast Warning. when a manual reset is performed,
the internal automatic reset
counter returns to 0.

Select the reset function after tripping.

Once reset, the frequency converter can
be restarted.

[0] * Manual reset Select [0] Manual reset to perform a reset

via [Reset] or via the digital inputs.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 99

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

14-20 Reset Mode 14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[1] Automatic reset Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1…x 20 in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To
x1 to perform between 1 and 20 automatic run continuously in current limit without tripping,
resets after tripping. set the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal
monitoring of the frequency converter remains
[2] Automatic reset
active.
x2
[3] Automatic reset
4 4 x3
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
Range: Function:
[4] Automatic reset
x4 60 s* [0 - Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When
[5] Automatic reset 60 s] the output torque reaches the torque limits
x5 (parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
[6] Automatic reset parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a
x6 warning is triggered. When the torque limit
warning has been continuously present for the
[7] Automatic reset
period specified in this parameter, the frequency
x7
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
[8] Automatic reset
the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal monitoring
x8
of the frequency converter remains active.
[9] Automatic reset
x9
14-27 Action At Inverter Fault
[10] Automatic reset
x 10 Option: Function:
[11] Automatic reset Select how the frequency converter reacts when
x 15 an overvoltage or grounding fault occurs.
[12] Automatic reset [0] Trip Disable the protection filters and trips at the first
x 20 fault.
[13] Infinite auto Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset for
[1] * Warning Run the protection filters normally.
reset continuous resetting after tripping.

[14] Reset at power- 14-28 Production Settings

up Option: Function:
14-21 Automatic Restart Time [0] * No action
[1] Service reset
Range: Function:
[3] Software Reset
10 s* [0 - 600 Enter the time interval from trip to start of the
s] automatic reset function. This parameter is 14-29 Service Code
active when parameter 14-20 Reset Mode is set
Range: Function:
to [1]–[13] Automatic reset.
0* [0 - 0x7FFFFFFF ] Only for service technicians’ use.

14-22 Operation Mode

Option: Function:
[0] * Normal Normal operation with motor selected.
operation
[2] Initialisation Reset parameter values to default
settings. The frequency converter resets
during the next power-up.

14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

Range: Function:
60 s* [0 - Enter the current limit trip delay in seconds. When
60 s] the output current reaches the current limit
(parameter 4-18 Current Limit), a warning is
triggered. When the current limit warning has
been continuously present for the period specified

100 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.13.3 14-3* Current Limit Control 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation

Range: Function:
The frequency converter features an integral current limit 66 %* [40 - Enter the minimum allowable magnetization
controller, which is activated when the motor current, and 75 %] for AEO. Selection of a low value reduces
thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in energy loss in the motor, but can also
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and reduce resistance to sudden load changes.
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation 14-44 d-axis current optimization for IPM

4 4
or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to
Range: Function:
reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as
possible without losing control of the motor. 100 [0 - This parameter is available only when
%* 200 %] parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [3]
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain PM, salient IPM.
Range: Function:
Normally, VVC+ PM control automatically
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the optimizes d-axis demagnetizing current based on
current limit controller. Selection of a high d-axis and q-axis settings. When
value makes the controller react faster. Too parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [3]
high a setting leads to controller PM, salient IPM, use this parameter to
instability. compensate the saturation effect at high load.
Usually, decreasing this value improves the
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time efficiency. However, 0% means no optimization
Range: Function: and the d-axis current is 0 (not recommended).
0.020 s* [0.002 - 2 s] Control the current limit control
integration time. Setting it to a lower
4.13.5 14-5* Environment
value makes it react faster. A setting too
low leads to control instability.
NOTICE
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time Perform a power cycle after changing any of the
Range: Function: parameters in parameter group 14-5* Environment.
5 ms* [1 - 100 ms] Set a time constant for the current limit
controller low-pass filter. These parameters help the frequency converter to operate
under special environmental conditions.

14-50 RFI Filter

4.13.4 14-4* Energy Optimizing
Option: Function:
Parameters for adjusting the energy optimization level in [0] Off
both variable torque (VT) and automatic energy optimi- [1] On
zation (AEO) mode in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics. [2] * Grid Type

14-40 VT Level 14-51 DC-Link Voltage Compensation

Range: Function: Option: Function:
66 % [40 - NOTICE [0] Off Disable DC-link compensation.
* 90 %]
This parameter cannot be adjusted while [1] * On Enable DC-link compensation.
the motor is running.
14-52 Fan Control
NOTICE This feature is only available in frequency converters 11–75 kW.
This parameter is not active when Option: Function:
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [5] * Constant-on mode
options that enable PM motor mode. [6] Constant-off mode
[7] On-when-Inverter-is-on-else-off Mode
Enter the level of motor magnetization at low [8] Variable-speed mode
speed. Selection of a low value reduces energy
loss in the motor, but also reduces load
capability.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 101

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

14-55 Output Filter 4.13.7 14-8* Options

Option: Function:
14-89 Option Detection
NOTICE
Selects the behavior when an option change is detected. This
This parameter cannot be changed
parameter returns to [0] Protect Option Config. after an option
while the motor is running.
change.

Select the type of output filter connected. Option: Function:

[0] * Protect Option Config. Freezes the current settings and
4 4 [0] * No Filter
[1] Sine-Wave Filter
prevents unwanted changes when
missing or defective options are
detected.
4.13.6 14-6* Auto Derate
[1] Enable Option Settings can be changed when the
Change system configuration is being
Use this parameter group to configure automatic derating
modified.
for the output current of the frequency converter.

14-61 Function at Inverter Overload

4.13.8 14-9* Fault Settings
When the frequency converter issues a frequency converter
overload warning, select whether to continue and trip the
Use the parameters to configure the fault settings.
frequency converter, or derate the output current.
Option: Function: 14-90 Fault Level
[0] * Trip Use this parameter to customize fault levels. The type of the
[1] Derate parameter is index, see Table 4.10.
Option: Function:
14-63 Min Switch Frequency
[0] Off This option uses index [4] to control the fault
Option: Function: level of alarm 14, Earth Fault.
Set the minimum switch frequency allowed by
[3] * Trip Lock Alarm is set to trip lock.
the output filter.
[4] Trip w. Alarm is configured into trip alarm, which can
[2] * 2.0 kHz
delayed be reset after a delay time. For example, if
[3] 3.0 kHz
reset alarm 13, Overcurrent is configured to this
[4] 4.0 kHz
option, it can be reset 3 minutes after the
[5] 5.0 kHz alarm. This option uses index [7] to control
[6] 6.0 kHz the fault level of alarm 13, Overcurrent.
[7] 8.0 kHz
[5] Flystart At start-up, the frequency converter tries to
[8] 10.0 kHz
catch a spinning motor. If this option is
[9] 12.0 kHz
selected, parameter 1-73 Flying Start is forced
[10] 16.0 kHz
to [1] Enabled. This option uses index [7] to
14-64 Dead Time Compensation Zero Current Level control the fault level of alarm 13,
Overcurrent.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled If using a long motor cable, select this option to
minimize the motor torque ripple.

14-65 Speed Derate Dead Time Compensation

Range: Function:
Size [ 20 - Deadtime compensation level is reduced
related* 1000 Hz] linearly versus output frequency from
the maximum level set in
parameter 14-07 Dead Time Compen-
sation Level to a minimum level set in
this parameter.

102 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

15-04 Over Temp's

Index Alarm Off Trip lock Trip w. Flystart
delayed
Range: Function:
0 Reserved – – – – 0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter
temperature faults.
1 Reserved – – – –
2 Reserved – – – –
15-05 Over Volt's
3 Reserved – – – –
4 Earth fault1) X D – – Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter
4 4
5 Reserved – – – –
6 Reserved – – – – overvoltages.

7 Overcurrent – D X X
15-06 Reset kWh Counter
Table 4.10 Table for Selection of Action when Option: Function:
Selected Alarm Appears (Parameter 14-90 Fault Level) [0] * Do not reset No reset of the kWh counter is required.
1) Only for frequency converter of power size 30–75 kW (40–100 hp).
[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to 0
If [0] Off is selected, the earth fault protection is disabled only for the
(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter).
earth fault which happens during running and the short circuit
current to earth is lower than 200%.
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
D = Default setting Option: Function:
X = Possible selection [0] * Do not reset
[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the running hours
NOTICE counter to 0 (see parameter 15-01 Running
Disabling the earth fault may damage the frequency Hours).
converter and void the warranty.

4.14.2 15-3* Alarm Log

4.14 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information
4.14.1 15-0* Operating Data Parameters in this group are array parameters, where up to
10 fault logs can be viewed. 0 is the most recent logged
data, and 9 is the oldest. Fault codes and values can be
15-00 Operating hours
viewed for all logged data.
Range: Function:
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code
0 h* [0 - 0x7fffffff. h] View how many hours the frequency
converter has run. The value is saved, Range: Function:
when the frequency converter is turned 0* [0 - 255 ] View the error code and look up its meaning in
off. chapter 6 Troubleshooting.

15-01 Running Hours 15-31 InternalFaultReason

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 h* [0 - View how many hours the motor has run. 0* [-32767 - View an extra description of the error. This
0x7fffffff. h] Reset the counter in parameter 15-07 Reset 32767 ] parameter is mostly used in combination
Running Hours Counter. The value is saved, with alarm 38, Internal Fault.
when the frequency converter is turned off.

15-02 kWh Counter

4.14.3 15-4* Drive Identification
Range: Function:
Parameters containing read-only information about the
0 kWh* [0 - Register the power consumption of hardware and software configuration of the frequency
2147483647 the motor as an average value over 1 converter.
kWh] hour. Reset the counter in
parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter. 15-40 FC Type
Range: Function:
15-03 Power Up's 0* [0 - 0 ] View the frequency converter type. The readout is
Range: Function: identical to the power field of the type code
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency definition, characters 1–6.
converter has been powered up.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 103

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

15-41 Power Section 15-53 Power Card Serial Number

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The readout is identical to the 0* [0 - 19 ] View the power card serial number.
power field of the type code definition, characters
7–10.
4.14.4 15-6* Option Indent.
15-42 Voltage
This read-only parameter group contains information about
Range: Function:
4 4 0* [0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The readout is identical to the
the hardware and software configuration of the options
installed in slots A, B, C0, and C1.
power field type of the type code definition,
characters 11–12. 15-60 Option Mounted
Range: Function:
15-43 Software Version Size related* [0 - 30 ] View the installed option type.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or package 15-61 Option SW Version
version) consisting of power SW and control SW. Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 20 ] View the installed option software
15-44 Ordered Typecode String version.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for reordering the 15-62 Option Ordering No
frequency converter in its original configuration. Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the
15-45 Actual Typecode String installed options.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40 ] View the actual type code. 15-63 Option Serial No
Range: Function:
15-46 Drive Ordering No Size related* [0 - 18 ] View the installed option serial number.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for 15-70 Option in Slot A
reordering the frequency converter in its original Range: Function:
configuration. 0* [0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option A, and a
translation of the type code string.
15-47 Power Card Ordering No
Range: Function: 15-71 Slot A Option SW Version
0* [0 - 8 ] View the power card ordering number. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option A.
15-48 LCP Id No
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the LCP ID number.
4.14.5 15-9* Parameter Info

15-49 SW ID Control Card Use this parameter group to view information about
available parameters for the frequency converter.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the control card software version number. 15-92 Defined Parameters
Range: Function:
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0* [0 - 2000 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the
Range: Function: frequency converter. The list ends with 0.
0* [0 - 20 ] View the power card software version number.
15-97 Application Type
15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFF ] This parameter contains data used by
0* [0 - 10 ] View the frequency converter serial number. MCT-10 Set-up Software.

104 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

15-98 Drive Identification 16-09 Custom Readout

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - 56 ] This parameter contains data used by MCT-10 Set- Readout Unit to
up Software. parameter 0-32 Custom
Readout Max Value.
15-99 Parameter Metadata
Range: Function: 4.15.2 16-1* Motor Status
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter contains data used by MCT-10
Set-up Software.
16-10 Power [kW] 4 4
4.15 Parameters: 16-** Data Readouts Range: Function:
0 kW* [0 - Shows motor power in kW. The calculated
1000 value shown is based on the actual motor
4.15.1 16-0* General Status kW] voltage and motor current. The value is filtered,
and therefore approximately 300 ms may pass
from when an input value changes to when
16-00 Control Word
the data readout values change. The resolution
Range: Function: of readout value on fieldbus is in 10 W steps.
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the control word sent from the frequency
converter via the serial communication port in 16-11 Power [hp]
hex code.
Range: Function:
0 hp* [0 - View the motor power in hp. The value shown
16-01 Reference [Unit]
1000 hp] is calculated on the basis of the actual motor
Range: Function: voltage and motor current. The value is
0 ReferenceFeed- [-4999 - 4999 View the present reference filtered, and therefore approximately 300 ms
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- value applied on impulse may pass from when an input value changes
backUnit] or analog basis in the unit to when the data readout values change.
resulting from the configu-
ration selected in 16-12 Motor Voltage
parameter 1-00 Configu-
Range: Function:
ration Mode.
0 V* [0 - 65535 V] View the motor voltage. A calculated value
is used for controlling the motor.
16-02 Reference [%]
Range: Function: 16-13 Frequency
0 %* [-200 - View the total reference. The total reference
Range: Function:
200 %] is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus,
0 Hz* [0 - 6553.5 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
and freeze references, plus catch up and
resonance dampening.
slow down.

16-14 Motor current

16-03 Status Word
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0 A* [0 - 655.35 View the motor current measured as an
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency
A] average value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and
converter via the serial communication port in
approximately 200 ms may pass from when
hex code.
an input value changes to when the data
readout values change.
16-05 Main Actual Value [%]
Range: Function: 16-15 Frequency [%]
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] View the 2-byte word sent with the status
Range: Function:
word to the bus master reporting the
0 %* [0 - View a 2-byte word reporting the actual
main actual value.
6553.5 %] motor frequency (without resonance
dampening) as a percentage (scale
16-09 Custom Readout
0000-4000 hex) of parameter 4-19 Max
Range: Function: Output Frequency.
0 CustomRea- [0 - 9999 View the custom readout from
doutUnit* CustomRea- parameter 0-30 Custom
doutUnit]

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 105

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

16-16 Torque [Nm] 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 Nm [-30000 - View the torque value with sign, applied to 0 A* [0 - 655.35 A] View the inverter nominal current, which
30000 Nm] the motor shaft. Some motors supply more should match the nameplate data on the
than 160% torque. As a result, the minimum connected motor. The data is used for
value and the maximum value depend on calculation of torque and motor protection.
the maximum motor current as well as the
motor used. 16-37 Inv. Max. Current

4 4 16-17 Speed [RPM]

Range: Function:
0 A* [0 - 655.35 A] View the inverter maximum current, which
Range: Function: should match the nameplate data on the
0 RPM [-30000 - View the actual motor RPM. In open-loop connected motor. The data is used for
30000 RPM] or closed-loop process control, the motor calculation of torque and motor protection.
RPM is estimated. In speed closed-loop
modes, the motor RPM is measured. 16-38 SL Controller State
Range: Function:
16-18 Motor Thermal
0* [0 - 20 ] View the state of the event under execution by
Range: Function: the SL controller.
0 %* [0 - View the calculated thermal load on the motor.
100 %] The cutout limit is 100%. The basis for 16-39 Control Card Temp.
calculation is the ETR function selected in Range: Function:
parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
0 °C* [0 - 65535 °C] View the temperature on the control card,
stated in °C.
16-22 Torque [%]
Range: Function:
0 %* [ -200– 200 % ] View the torque in percent of nominal
4.15.4 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
torque, with sign, applied to the motor
shaft. 16-50 External Reference
Range: Function:
4.15.3 16-3* Drive Status 0 %* [-200 - View the total reference, the sum of digital,
200 %] analog, preset, bus, and freeze references,
16-30 DC Link Voltage plus catch up and slow down.

Range: Function:
16-52 Feedback[Unit]
0 V* [0 - 65535 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
Range: Function:
with a 128 ms time constant.
0 [-4999 - 4999 View the feedback unit
16-33 Brake Energy Average ProcessCtrlUnit* ProcessCtrlUnit] resulting from the selection
of unit and scaling in
Range: Function:
parameter 3-00 Reference
0 kW* [0 - 10000 View the brake power transmitted to an
Range,
kW] external brake resistor. The mean power is
parameter 3-01 Reference/
calculated on an average level based on
Feedback Unit,
the latest 120 s.
parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference, and
16-34 Heatsink Temp. parameter 3-03 Maximum
Range: Function: Reference.
0 °C* [-128 - View the frequency converter heat sink
127 °C] temperature. The cutout limit is 90 ±5 °C 16-53 Digi Pot Reference
[194 °F], and the motor cuts back in at 60 Range: Function:
±5 °C [140 °F].
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the contribution of the digital potenti-
ometer to the actual reference.
16-35 Inverter Thermal
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 255 %] View the percentage load on the inverter.

106 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

16-57 Feedback [RPM] 16-66 Digital Output

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 RPM* [-30000 - Readout parameter where the actual motor 0* [0 - 63 ] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
30000 RPM] RPM from the feedback source can be read
in both closed loop and open loop. The Bit 2 Digital output terminal 29
feedback source is selected in Bit 3 Digital output terminal 27
parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source. Bit 4 Digital output terminal 45
Bit 5 Digital output terminal 42

4.15.5 16-6* Inputs and Outputs Table 4.12 Bits Definition 4 4

16-60 Digital Input 16-67 Pulse input 29 [Hz]
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0* [0 - View the actual state of the digital inputs 18, 19, 0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29.
4095 ] 27, and 29.
16-68 Pulse input 33 [Hz]
Bit 0 Digital input terminal 33
Bit 1 Digital input terminal 32 Range: Function:
Bit 2 Digital input terminal 29 0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual value of the frequency
Bit 3 Digital input terminal 27 applied at terminal 33 as an impulse input.
Bit 4 Digital input terminal 19
Bit 5 Digital input terminal 18 16-69 Pulse output 27 [Hz]
Bit 10 Digital input terminal 31 Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of impulses applied to
Table 4.11 Bits Definition terminal 27 in digital output mode.

16-61 Terminal 53 Setting 16-70 Pulse output 29 [Hz]

Option: Function: Range: Function:

View the setting of input terminal 53. 0* [0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses to terminal 29
in digital output mode.
[0] Current mode
[1] Voltage mode 16-71 Relay output
16-62 Analog input 53 Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 31 ] View the settings of all relays.

1* [0 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 53. Bit 3 User relay 02

Bit 4 User relay 01
16-63 Terminal 54 Setting
Option: Function: Table 4.13 Bits Definition
View the setting of input terminal 54.

[0] Current mode 16-72 Counter A

[1] Voltage mode Range: Function:
0* [-32768 - View the present value of counter A. Counters are
16-64 Analog input 54
32767 ] useful as comparator operands, see
Range: Function: parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
1* [0 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 54. The value can be reset or changed either via
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs),
16-65 Analog output 42 [mA] or by using an SLC action (parameter 13-52 SL
Range: Function: Controller Action).
0 mA* [0 - 20 View the actual value at output 42. The
mA] value shown reflects the selections in 16-73 Counter B
parameter 6-90 Terminal 42 Mode and Range: Function:
parameter 6-91 Terminal 42 Analog Output. 0* [-32768 - View the present value of counter B. Counters are
32767 ] useful as comparator operands
(parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand).

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 107

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

16-73 Counter B 4.15.7 16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

Range: Function:
The value can be reset or changed either via Use the parameters to display alarm, warning, and
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs) extended status words.
or by using an SLC action (parameter 13-52 SL 16-90 Alarm Word
Controller Action).
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] View the alarm word sent via the serial
16-79 Analog output 45 [mA]

4 4
communication port in hex code.
Range: Function:
0 mA* [0 - 20 View the actual value at output 45 in mA. 16-91 Alarm Word 2
mA] The value shown reflects the selection in
Range: Function:
parameter 6-70 Terminal 45 Mode and
0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] View the alarm word 2 sent via the
parameter 6-71 Terminal 45 Analog Output.
serial communication port in hex code.

4.15.6 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port 16-92 Warning Word

Range: Function:
Parameters for reporting the bus references and control 0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] View the warning word sent via the
words. serial communication port in hex code.
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
16-93 Warning Word 2
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
65535 ] from the bus master. Interpretation of the CTW 0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] View the warning word 2 sent via the
depends on the fieldbus option installed and the serial communication port in hex code.
CTW profile selected in parameter 8-10 Control
Word Profile. For more information, refer to the 16-94 Ext. Status Word
relevant fieldbus manuals. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] Return the extended status word sent
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 via the serial communication port in
Range: Function: hex code.
0* [-32768 - To set the reference value, view the 2-byte
32767 ] word sent with the control word from the 16-95 Ext. Status Word 2
bus master. For more information, refer to Range: Function:
the relevant fieldbus manual. 0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] Return the extended status word 2 sent
via the serial communication port in
16-84 Comm. Option STW hex code.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the extended fieldbus communication 16-97 Alarm Word 3
option status word. For more information, refer Range: Function:
to the relevant fieldbus manual. 0* [0 - 0xFFFFFFFFUL ] Show the alarm word 3 sent via the
serial communication port in hex code.
16-85 FC Port CTW 1
Range: Function: 4.16 Parameters: 17-** Feedback Options
1084* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
65535 ] from the bus master. Interpretation of the
4.16.1 17-1* Inc.Enc.Interface
control word depends on the fieldbus option
installed and the control word profile 17-10 Signal Type
selected in parameter 8-10 Control Word Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the encoder in use.
Profile. Find the information on the encoder datasheet.
Option: Function:
16-86 FC Port REF 1
[0] None
Range: Function: [1] * RS422 (5V TTL)
0* [-32768 - 32767 ] View the last received reference from the [2] Sinusoidal 1Vpp
FC port.

108 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

17-11 Resolution (PPR) 4.17 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2

Range: Function:
4.17.1 18-8* Center Winder Readout
1024* [10 - 16384 ] Enter the resolution of the incremental
track, which is the number of pulses or
periods per revolution. 18-81 Tension PID Output
Range: Function:
0 Hz* [-5000 - 5000 Hz] Read-only parameter used to show
4.16.2 17-5* Resolver Interface the output of the tension loop PID.

17-50 Poles 18-82 Center Winder Output

4 4
Range: Function: Range: Function:
2* [2 - 2 ] 0 Hz* [-5000 - 5000 Hz] Read-only parameter used to display
the output of the tension loop PID.
17-51 Input Voltage
Range: Function: 18-83 Line Speed
7 V* [2 - 8 V]
Range: Function:
17-52 Input Frequency 0 Hz* [-5000 - 5000 Hz] Read-only parameter used to display
the output of the tension loop PID.
Range: Function:
10 kHz* [2 - 15 kHz]
18-84 Diameter
17-53 Transformation Ratio Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Read-only parameter that is used to display
0.5* [0.1 - 1.1 ] the diameter of the roll.

17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution 18-85 Tapered Tension Set Point

Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * Disabled 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Read-only parameter used to display the
[1] 512 tapered tension setpoint.
[2] 1024
[3] 2048 18-86 Tension Feedback
[4] 4096 Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Read-only parameter used to display the
17-59 Resolver Interface
actual tension feedback.
Option: Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1] Enabled 4.17.2 18-9* PID Readouts

4.16.3 17-6* Monitoring and App. 18-90 Process PID Error

Range: Function:
17-60 Feedback Direction 0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Give the present error value used by the
Option: Function: process PID controller.

[0] * Clockwise
18-91 Process PID Output
[1] Counter clockwise
Range: Function:
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring 0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Give the present raw output value from
Option: Function: the process PID controller.
[0] Disabled
[1] * Warning 18-92 Process PID Clamped Output
[2] Trip Range: Function:
[3] Jog 0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Give the present output value from the
[4] Freeze Output process PID controller after the clamp
[5] Max Speed limits have been observed.
[6] Switch to Open Loop

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 109

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output 21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - Give the present output value from the 0 ExtPID1Unit* [-999999.999 - This parameter is used as the
200 %] process PID controller after the clamp 999999.999 reference for comparing
limits have been observed, and the ExtPID1Unit] feedback values. The setpoint
resulting value has been gain scaled. can be offset with digital,
analog, or bus references.
4.18 Parameters: 21-** Ext. Closed Loop
4 4 4.18.1 21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit]
Range: Function:
0 ExtPID1Unit* [-999999.999 - Return the resulting
21-09 Extended PID Enable 999999.999 ExtPID1Unit] reference value.
Select the extended CL PID controller that is to be autotuned.
Option: Function: 21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit]
[0] * Disabled Range: Function:
[1] Enabled Ext CL1 PID 0 ExtPID1Unit* [-999999.999 - Return the feedback
999999.999 ExtPID1Unit] value.
4.18.2 21-1* Ext. Closed-loop Reference/
feedback 21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%]
Range: Function:
21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Return the extended closed loop 1 PID
controller output value.
Range: Function:
0 ExtPID1Unit* [ -999999.999 - This parameter sets the
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control
999999.999 minimum value that can be
Select [0] Normal if the controller output should be reduced
ExtPID1Unit] obtained by the sum of the
when the feedback is higher than the reference. Select [1] Inverse
setpoint and reference.
if the output should be increased when the feedback is higher
than the reference.
21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference
Range: Function: Option: Function:
100 [ -999999.999 - This parameter sets the [0] * Normal
ExtPID1Unit 999999.999 maximum value that can [1] Inverse
ExtPID1Unit] be obtained by the sum of
21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain
the setpoint and reference.
Range: Function:
21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source 0.01* [0 - 10 ] The proportional gain indicates the number of
times the error between the setpoint and the
This parameter defines which input on the frequency converter
feedback signal is to be applied.
should be treated as the source of the reference signal.
Option: Function: 21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time
[0] * No function
Range: Function:
[1] Analog Input 53
10000 s* [0.01 - The integrator provides an increasing
[2] Analog Input 54
10000 s] gain at a constant error between the
[7] Frequency input 29
setpoint and the feedback signal. The
[8] Frequency input 33 integral time is the time needed by the
integrator to reach the same gain as the
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source
proportional gain.
This parameter defines which input on the frequency converter
should be treated as the source of the feedback signal.
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentation Time
Option: Function:
Range: Function:
[0] * No function
0 s* [0 - 10 s] The differentiator does not react to a constant
[1] Analog Input 53
error. It only provides a gain when the error
[2] Analog Input 54 changes. The quicker the error changes, the
[3] Frequency input 29 stronger the gain from the differentiator.
[4] Frequency input 33

110 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit status. If parameter 22-45 Setpoint Boost is not set,
Range: Function: the frequency converter enters sleep mode.

5* [1 - 50 ] Set a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). The DG 2. After parameter 22-46 Maximum Boost Time, the
increases if there are fast changes. Limit the DG to frequency converter ramps the motor speed
obtain a pure differentiator gain at slow changes down to parameter 1-82 Min Speed for Function at
and a constant differentiator gain where quick Stop [Hz].
changes occur. 3. The frequency converter activates
parameter 1-80 Function at Stop. The frequency
4.19 Parameters: 22-** Application
Functions
converter is now in sleep mode. 4 4
4. When the error between reference and feedback
is greater than parameter 22-44 Wake-Up Ref./FB
22-02 Sleepmode CL Control Mode
Diff, and the condition lasts more than
This parameter is used to set whether feedback is detected for parameter 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time, the
entering sleep mode in process closed loop. frequency converter is out of sleep mode.
Option: Function:
5. The frequency converter reverts to closed-loop
[0] * Normal Detect feedback together control.
with other parameters.

[1] Simplified Do not detect feedback.

NOTICE
Sleep mode is not active when local reference is active
Only check sleep speed and
(set speed manually with navigation keys on the LCP).
time.
Does not work in hand-on mode. Auto set-up in open
loop must be carried out before setting input/output in
4.19.1 22-4* Sleep Mode closed loop.

The sequence when running sleep mode in open loop: 22-40 Minimum Run Time
1. The motor speed is less than Range: Function:
parameter 22-47 Sleep Speed [Hz] and the motor
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the wanted minimum running time for
has been running longer than
the motor after a start command (digital
parameter 22-40 Minimum Run Time.
input or bus) before entering sleep mode.
2. The frequency converter ramps the motor speed
down to parameter 1-82 Min Speed for Function at 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time
Stop [Hz]. Range: Function:
3. The frequency converter activates 10 s* [0 - 600 s] Set the minimum time for staying in sleep
parameter 1-80 Function at Stop. The frequency mode. This time overrides any wake-up
converter is now in sleep mode. conditions.
4. The frequency converter compares the speed
setpoint with parameter 22-43 Wake-Up Speed [Hz] 22-43 Wake-Up Speed [Hz]
to detect wake-up situation. Range: Function:
5. The speed setpoint is greater than 10* [0 - Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
parameter 22-43 Wake-Up Speed [Hz] and the 400.0 ] Mode is set to [0] Open loop, and an external
sleep condition has lasted for more than controller applies speed reference. Set the
parameter 22-41 Minimum Sleep Time. The reference speed at which the sleep mode should
frequency converter is now out of sleep mode. be deactivated.

6. Go back to speed open-loop control (ramp motor The wake-up speed must not exceed the setting
speed up to the speed setpoint). in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].

The sequence when running sleep mode in closed loop: 22-44 Wake-Up Ref./FB Diff
1. If parameter 20-81 PI Normal/ Inverse Control=[0]
Range: Function:
Normal. When the error between reference and
feedback is greater than parameter 22-44 Wake-Up 10 % [0 - Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
Ref./FB Diff, the frequency converter enters boost * 100 %] Mode is set to [1] Closed loop, and the
integrated PI controller is used for controlling
the pressure.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 111

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

22-44 Wake-Up Ref./FB Diff 4.19.2 22-6* Broken-belt Detection

Range: Function:
Set the pressure drop allowed in percentage of Use broken-belt detection in both closed-loop systems and
setpoint for the pressure (Pset) before canceling open-loop systems for pumps and fans. If the estimated
the sleep mode. motor torque (current) is below the broken-belt torque
(current) value (parameter 22-61 Broken Belt Torque), and
22-45 Setpoint Boost the frequency converter output frequency is above or
equal to 15 Hz, parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is
Range: Function:
4 4
performed.
0% [-100 - Only to be used if parameter 1-00 Configuration
* 100 %] Mode is set to [1] Speed closed loop, and the 22-60 Broken Belt Function
integrated PI controller is used. In systems with Option: Function:
for example constant pressure control, it is Select the actions to be performed if the broken-
advantageous to increase the system pressure belt condition is detected.
before the motor is stopped. This extends the
[0] * Off
time in which the motor is stopped and helps to
[1] Warning The frequency converter continues to run, but
avoid frequent start/stop.
activates warning 95, Broken belt. A frequency
Set the desired overpressure/temperature in
converter digital output or a serial communication
percentage of setpoint for the pressure (Pset)/
bus communicates a warning to other equipment.
temperature before entering the sleep mode.
If set to 5%, the boost pressure is Pset x 1.05. The [2] Trip The frequency converter stops running and
negative values can be used for cooling tower activates alarm 95, Broken belt. A frequency
control where a negative change is needed. converter digital output or a serial communication
bus communicates an alarm to other equipment.
22-46 Maximum Boost Time
Range: Function: 22-61 Broken Belt Torque
60 [0 - Only to be used when parameter 1-00 Configu- Range: Function:
s* 600 s] ration Mode is set to [1] Speed closed loop, and the 10 %* [5 - 100 %] Set the broken-belt torque as a percentage
integrated PI controller is used for controlling the of the rated motor torque.
pressure.
Set the maximum time for which boost mode is 22-62 Broken Belt Delay
allowed. If the set time is exceeded, sleep mode is Range: Function:
entered, not waiting for the set boost pressure to
10 s* [0 - 600 Set the time for which the broken-belt
be reached.
s] conditions must be active before carrying out
the action selected in parameter 22-60 Broken
22-47 Sleep Speed [Hz]
Belt Function.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - Set the speed below which the frequency 4.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features
400.0 ] converter goes into sleep mode.

The sleep speed must not exceed the setting in

4.20.1 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
parameter 22-43 Wake-Up Speed [Hz].
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
22-48 Sleep Delay Time Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size related* [0 - 60 s] High starting torque time for PM
0 s* [0 - 3600 s] Set the delay time that the motor waits motors in VVC+ mode without
before entering sleep mode when the feedback.
condition to enter sleep mode is met.
30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
22-49 Wake-Up Delay Time Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size related* [ 0 - 200.0 %] High starting torque current for PM
0 s* [0 - 3600 s] Set the delay time that the motor waits motors in VVC+ mode without
before waking up from sleep mode when the feedback.
condition to wake up is met.
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection
Option: Function:
[0] * Off

112 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

30-22 Locked Rotor Protection 4.22 Parameters: 33-** Motion Control Adv.
Option: Function: Settings
[1] On The locked rotor protection for PM motors.
33-00 Homing Mode
30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s] Select the homing mode.
Range: Function: Option: Function:
0.10 s* [0.05 - 1 s] The locked rotor detection time for PM [0] Not forced If [0] Not forced is selected, homing operation
motors. * does not need to be carried out.

[1] Forced If [1] Forced manual homing is selected, 4 4

4.21 Parameters: 32-** Motion Control Basic manual homing operation has to be carried out before
Settings homing positioning. In this mode, the homing
direction should be specified by the sign of
32-11 User Unit Denominator parameter 33-03 Homing Velocity. It means that
Range: Function: the user must know that the home position is
1* [1 - All target positions are made in user units and at forward or backward direction relative to
65535 ] are converted to quad-counts internally. By the current position before homing.
selecting scaling units, it is possible to work [2] Forced If [2] Forced automated homing is selected,
with any measurement unit (for example mm). automated homing operation also has to be carried out
This factor consists of a numerator and homing before positioning. In this mode, homing
denominator. operation should work together with HW limit
switches, otherwise the homing behavior is
32-12 User Unit Numerator the same as selection [1] Forced manual
Range: Function: homing. In this mode, the homing motion
1* [1 - All target positions are made in user units and starts with the velocity set in
65535 ] are converted to quad-counts internally. By parameter 33-03 Homing Velocity, once any 1
selecting scaling units, it is possible to work of HW limit switches is probed, the homing
with any measurement unit (for example mm). direction is reversed until the home switch is
This factor consists of a numerator and probed. If the home switch was still not
denominator. probed after both HW Neg. and Pos. limit
switches were probed, the alarm Position Ctrl.
32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error Fault is reported with fault reason Cannot find
home position, which is shown in
Range: Function:
parameter 37-18 Pos. Ctrl Fault Reason.
2000000* [1 - This parameter defines the
2147483648 ] maximum error allowed between
33-01 Home Offset
the actual position and the
calculated command position. If Range: Function:
the actual error exceeds the value 0* [-1073741824 - Use this parameter to set an offset of
set in this parameter, the position- 1073741824 ] 0 (home position) compared to the
control-fault alarm is triggered. position after homing.

32-80 Maximum Allowed Velocity 33-02 Home Ramp Time

Range: Function: Range: Function:
1500 RPM* [1 - 30000 RPM] This parameter defines the 10 ms* [1 - 1000 This parameter defines the ramp time (in
maximum velocity in RPM during ms] ms) from standstill to the value set in
motion control. parameter 32-80 Maximum Allowed Velocity.

32-81 Motion Ctrl Quick Stop Ramp 33-03 Homing Velocity

Range: Function: Range: Function:
1000 ms* [50 - 3600000 This parameter defines the quick- 100 [-1500 - This parameter defines the velocity of
ms] stop ramp time from the RPM* 1500 RPM] homing. It must not exceed the
maximum allowed velocity to 0 parameter 32-80 Maximum Allowed
for motion control. Velocity.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 113

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

33-04 Homing Behaviour 4.23 Parameters: 34-** Motion Control Data

Option: Function: Readouts
Define the behavior when the home
switch is found: Reversing without index
4.23.1 34-0* PCD Writer Par.
(0 pulse) search, or forwarding without
index search. Parameters for readout of fieldbus data received from
fieldbus master.
[1] * Reverse no index
[3] Forward no index 34-01 PCD 1 Write For Application
4 4 33-41 Negative Software Limit
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD1 of fieldbus telegram.
Range: Function:
-500000* [-1073741824 This parameter is active only during 34-02 PCD 2 Write For Application
- 1073741824 ] positioning if
Range: Function:
parameter 33-43 Negative Software
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD2 of fieldbus telegram.
Limit Active is set to [1] Active. When
parameter 34-50 Actual Position
34-03 PCD 3 Write For Application
reaches below the negative software
limit set in this parameter, a position Range: Function:
control fault alarm is reported. 0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD3 of fieldbus telegram.

33-42 Positive Software Limit 34-04 PCD 4 Write For Application

Range: Function: Range: Function:
500000* [-1073741824 This parameter is active only during 0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD4 of fieldbus telegram.
- 1073741824 ] positioning if parameter 33-44 Positive
Software Limit Active is set to [1] 34-05 PCD 5 Write For Application
Active. When parameter 34-50 Actual Range: Function:
Position reaches above the positive 0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD5 of fieldbus telegram.
software limit set in this parameter, a
position control fault alarm is reported. 34-06 PCD 6 Write For Application
Range: Function:
33-43 Negative Software Limit Active
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD6 of fieldbus telegram.
Option: Function:
[0] * Inactive 34-07 PCD 7 Write For Application
[1] Active When this parameter is set to active, the
Range: Function:
frequency converter continuously checks whether
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD7 of fieldbus telegram.
the target position is below the negative software
limit. If it occurs, an error is issued and the
34-08 PCD 8 Write For Application
frequency converter control is switched off.
Range: Function:
33-44 Positive Software Limit Active 0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD8 of fieldbus telegram.
Option: Function:
34-09 PCD 9 Write For Application
[0] * Inactive
[1] Active When this parameter is set to active, the Range: Function:
frequency converter continuously checks whether 0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD9 of fieldbus telegram.
the target position is above the positive software
limit. If it occurs, an error is issued and the 34-10 PCD 10 Write For Application
frequency converter control is switched off. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value received in PCD10 of fieldbus telegram.
33-47 Target Position Window
Range: Function:
512* [1 - 10000 ] Defines the size of the target window with
user unit. A position is only viewed as
reached when the actual position is within
this window.

114 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

4.23.2 34-2* PCD Read Par. 34-56 Track Error

Range: Function:
Parameters for readout of fieldbus data sent to the fieldbus 0* [-2147483647 - Readout of the error between
master. 2147483647 ] calculated command position and
34-21 PCD 1 Read For Application actual position in user unit.

Range: Function:
4.24 Parameters: 37-** Application Settings
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD1 of fieldbus telegram.
4.24.1 37-0* Application Mode
34-22 PCD 2 Read For Application 4 4
Range: Function: 37-00 Application Mode
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD2 of fieldbus telegram.
Option: Function:
[0] * Drive mode
34-23 PCD 3 Read For Application
[1] Center winder
Range: Function:
[2] Position Control
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD3 of fieldbus telegram. [3] Synchronization

34-24 PCD 4 Read For Application

4.24.2 37-1* Position Control
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD4 of fieldbus telegram.
37-01 Pos. Feedback Source
34-25 PCD 5 Read For Application Select position feedback source.

Range: Function: Option: Function:

0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD5 of fieldbus telegram. [0] * 24V Encoder
[1] MCB102
34-26 PCD 6 Read For Application [2] MCB103

Range: Function: 37-02 Pos. Target

0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD6 of fieldbus telegram.
Range: Function:
0* [-1073741824 If parameter 37-03 Pos. Type is set to [0]
34-27 PCD 7 Read For Application
- 1073741824 ] Absolute, the target position is an absolute
Range: Function: position (relative to home position). If the
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD7 of fieldbus telegram. parameter 37-03 Pos. Type is set to [1] Relative
and the last position was obtained through
34-28 PCD 8 Read For Application jogging, the target position is relative to that
Range: Function: position. If the last position was reached as a
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD8 of fieldbus telegram. result of a positioning command, then the
target position is relative to the last target
34-29 PCD 9 Read For Application position regardless of being reached or not.

Range: Function:
37-03 Pos. Type
0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD9 of fieldbus telegram.
This parameter defines the target position type.

34-30 PCD 10 Read For Application Option: Function:

Range: Function: [0] * Absolute

0* [0 - 65535 ] Value sent in PCD10 of fieldbus telegram. [1] Relative

37-04 Pos. Velocity

4.23.3 34-5* Process Data Range: Function:
100 [1 - 30000 Defines the velocity during positioning.
Readout of process data for motion control. RPM* RPM] The maximum value must not exceed the
value specified in
34-50 Actual Position
parameter 32-80 Maximum Allowed Velocity.
Range: Function:
0* [-1073741824 - The actual position in user
1073741824 ] unit.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 115

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

37-05 Pos. Ramp Up Time 37-11 Pos. Brake Wear Limit

Range: Function: Range: Function:
5000 [50 - It is defined as the time in milliseconds limit in user unit set in this parameter, the
ms* 100000 ms] that it takes to ramp from standstill to frequency converter reports an alarm
parameter 32-80 Maximum Allowed POSITION CTRL FAULT with fault reason
Velocity. Brake Wear Limit Exceeded.

37-06 Pos. Ramp Down Time 37-12 Pos. PID Anti Windup

4 4 Range: Function: Configure whether to enable the anti-windup of positioning PID.

5000 [50 - It is defined as the time in milliseconds Option: Function:
ms* 100000 ms] that it takes to ramp from [0] Disable
parameter 32-80 Maximum Allowed [1] * Enable
Velocity to standstill.
37-13 Pos. PID Output Clamp
37-07 Pos. Auto Brake Ctrl Range: Function:
When the automatic brake control function is disabled, the 1000* [1 - This parameter clamps the total output of
frequency converter controls the application also at standstill. 10000 ] the PID. A setting of 1000 corresponds to
When the automatic brake control function is enabled, the 100% of parameter 32-80 Maximum Allowed
mechanical brake is automatically activated every time the Velocity.
application is at standstill for a time period specified in
parameter 37-08 Pos. Hold Delay. 37-14 Pos. Ctrl. Source
Option: Function: Select the control source for positioning control.
[0] Disable Option: Function:
[1] * Enable [0] * DI
[1] FieldBus
37-08 Pos. Hold Delay
Range: Function: 37-15 Pos. Direction Block
0 ms* [0 - 10000 To be used with the automatic brake Use this parameter to configure whether to block a direction,
ms] control function. The hold delay is a and the direction to be blocked.
waiting period in which the brake is not
Option: Function:
activated even though the application is at
[0] * No Blocking
standstill.
[1] Block Reverse

37-09 Pos. Coast Delay [2] Block Forward

Range: Function: 37-17 Pos. Ctrl Fault Behaviour

200 ms* [0 - 1000 To be used with the automatic brake This parameter determines the behavior of the frequency
ms] control function. The coast delay is the converter after a fault is detected.
delay from activating the mechanical
Option: Function:
brake to disabling the controller and
[0] * Ramp Down&Brake
coasting the frequency converter.
[1] Brake Directly

37-10 Pos. Brake Delay 37-18 Pos. Ctrl Fault Reason

Range: Function: READ-ONLY PARAMETER: The current fault reason of the alarm.
200 ms* [0 - 1000 To be used with the automatic brake POSITION CTRL FAULT is shown in this parameter.
ms] control function. The brake delay is the
Option: Function:
delay after activating the control and
[0] * No Fault
magnetizing the motor before opening
[1] Homing Needed
the brake.
[2] Pos. HW Limit

37-11 Pos. Brake Wear Limit [3] Neg. HW Limit

[4] Pos. SW Limit
Range: Function:
[5] Neg. SW Limit
0* [0 - Set this parameter to a positive value.
[7] Brake Wear Limit
1073741824 ] While the brake is activated, if the
[8] Quick Stop
frequency converter moves more than the
[9] PID Error Too Big

116 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

37-18 Pos. Ctrl Fault Reason 37-22 Taper Set Point

READ-ONLY PARAMETER: The current fault reason of the alarm. Range: Function:
POSITION CTRL FAULT is shown in this parameter.
Option: Function:
[12] Rev. Operation
[13] Fwd. Operation
[20] Can not find home position

37-19 Pos. New Index

Range: Function: Illustration 4.31 Tapered Tension Setpoint
4 4
0* [0 - 255 ] The currently latched index number.

4.24.3 37-2* Center Winder NOTICE

Taper is not required in unwinding
applications. For unwinding applications,
37-20 Winder Mode Selection
leave this parameter set to 0.
Use the machine for either winding or unwinding.
Option: Function:
37-23 Partial Roll Diameter Value
[0] * Wind
[1] Unwind Range: Function:
5 %* [5 - Preset the diameter when a partial roll is loaded
37-21 Tension Set Point 100 %] on the winder. If Input 4 is ON when the
Range: Function: diameter is reset with Input 8, the diameter is
0 %* [0 - Set the desired running tension. 100.0% means preset to the value programmed in this
100 %] full tension. Full tension is the point at which the parameter. For unwinding applications, use this
load cell or dancer produces a 20 mA or 10 V parameter to set the full roll diameter.
signal.
37-24 Core1 Diameter
NOTICE Range: Function:
The taper setting affects the actual tension
5 %* [5 - Set the main core value to be used on the
on the web. If a dancer system is used, this
100 %] winder. This parameter must be set for the
value sets the dancer running position
smallest core diameter for both winding and
which would normally be 500 or center of
unwinding applications.
movement. This parameter is only active if
parameter 37-36 Tension Set Point Input is NOTICE
set to 0. The value of parameter 37-24 Core1
Diameter must be less than
parameter 37-25 Core2 Diameter.
37-22 Taper Set Point
Range: Function:
0% [-110 Change the tension setpoint as the diameter 37-25 Core2 Diameter
* - increases. The result of the taper function is called Range: Function:
110 %] the tapered tension setpoint. The tapered tension 5 %* [5 - 100 %] Set a secondary core diameter for winding
setpoint is always equal to the tension setpoint at applications, or a secondary full roll diameter
core. This parameter is only active if for unwinding applications.
parameter 37-37 Taper Set Point Input is set to a
value of 0. A value of 0 means no taper or the 37-26 Winder Jog Speed
tapered tension setpoint will always be equal to
Range: Function:
the tension setpoint. A value of 100.0% is 100.0%
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Set the winder jog speed percentage. This
taper or each time the diameter doubles from core
percentage value is used for both forward
the tapered tension setpoint is decreased to 50%
and reverse jogging speed.
of the previous value. Negative tapers are also
possible.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 117

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

37-27 TLD Low Limit 37-33 Diameter Measurement Input

Range: Function: Set the analog input used for diameter measurement.
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Set the low limit for the tension limit Option: Function:
detection. [1] Input53(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
[2] Input54(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
37-28 TLD High Limit
Range: Function: 37-34 Reading at Core
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Set the high limit for the tension limit Range: Function:
4 4 detection. 0* [0 - 10 ] Set the analog input signal reading at the smallest
core used.
37-29 TLD Timer
Range: Function: 37-35 Reading at Full Roll
0.001 s* [0.001 - 5 s] Set the time within which the tension Range: Function:
must exceed the high or low tension 0 V* [0 - 10 V] Set the analog input signal reading at the full
limit. roll size used.

37-30 TLDOnDelay 37-36 Tension Set Point Input

Enable this parameter to allow time for the winder to stabilize Set the source of the tension setpoint.
the web tension. When the tension moves within the low and Option: Function:
high tension limits, the TLD function begins operating normally.
[0] * Par.3721
This function can be useful during a quick machine start with a
[1] Input53(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
slack web. This function is only active while running.
[2] Input54(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
Option: Function:
[0] Disabled 37-37 Taper Set Point Input
[1] * Enabled Set the source of the taper setpoint.
Option: Function:
37-31 Diameter Limit Detector
[0] * Par.3722
Range: Function:
[1] Input53(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
100 %* [0 - When the calculated roll diameter reaches
[2] Input54(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
100 %] the set diameter, the corresponding digital
output is turned on to indicate the end of 37-38 Tension Feedback Input
the roll. This indicates a full roll when Set analog input used for tension feedback.
winding and an empty roll when unwinding.
Option: Function:
37-32 Initial Diameter Measurement [0] * No Function
[1] Input53(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
It is possible to connect a roll diameter sensor to 1 of the
[2] Input54(0~10 VDC or 0~20 mA )
frequency converter analog inputs. This signal can be used to
make the controller use a measured initial diameter, rather than a 37-39 Tension Feedback Type
diameter size set by parameters.
Select the device type used for tension feedback.
Option: Function:
Option: Function:
[0] * Set diameter Set the diameter in
[0] * Load cell
when diameter parameter 37-23 Partial Roll
[1] Dancer
reset Diameter Value to
parameter 37-25 Core2 Diameter 37-40 Center Winder Cmd Src
when the diameter is reset.
Configure the command source for controlling.
[1] Set diameter The frequency converter sets the Option: Function:
based on analog diameter based on an analog
[0] Digital and parameter
signal signal. The diameter can only be
[1] * Parameter 3754~3759 control the functions
reset when the tension is OFF.
[2] Digital input control

37-33 Diameter Measurement Input

Set the analog input used for diameter measurement.
Option: Function:
[0] * No Function

118 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Descriptions Programming Guide

37-41 Diameter Change Rate 37-47 Tension PID Profile

Range: Function: Range: Function:
0.001 %* [0.001 - 0.05 %] Set the number of changes allowed profiled. Sometimes, it might be desirable to be less
for the diameter in each program than fully profiled, which would give over-compen-
scan. sation when the diameter increases.

37-42 Tapered Tension Change Rate

Range: Function:
0.1 %* [0.1 - Set the amount of tapered tension that can 4 4
1 %] change during each scan period. This
function ramps the tapered tension setpoint
to the preset value when the user changes
either the tension or taper setpoints. This Illustration 4.32 Tension PID Profiler
ensures stability during step changes in
setpoints.

37-43 Diameter Calculator Min Speed 37-48 Tension PID Proportional Gain
Range: Function: Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - Set the minimum line speed to be achieved 0* [0 - 10 ] Set the proportional gain for tension loop PID
100 %] before the diameter calculator is activated. At amplifier.
low line speeds, the resolution of the line and
winder speed are too low for the diameter to 37-49 Tension PID Derivate Time
be accurately calculated. Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 20 s] Set the derivative time for tension loop PID
37-44 Line Acceleration Feed Forward amplifier.
Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20 ] Set the feed-forward speed that helps 37-50 Tension PID Integral Time
compensate for tension changes caused by line Range: Function:
speed acceleration and deceleration. 501 s* [0.01 - 501 s] Set the integral time for tension loop PID
amplifier.
37-45 Line Speed Source
Use this parameter to set the input for line speed. 37-51 Tension PID Out Limit
Option: Function: Range: Function:
[0] * No function 0 %* [0 - Set the maximum tension PID loop output
[1] 24V encoder 100 %] that can be added to the open-loop speed
[2] MCB102 reference. The value is normally set to limit
[3] MCB103 the contribution of the tension PID loop to
[4] Analog input 53 10% of the maximum reference speed.
[5] Analog input 54
[6] Frequency input 29 37-52 Tension PID Der Gain Limit
[7] Frequency input 33 Range: Function:
5* [1 - 50 ] Set the limit for derivation gain in tension loop
37-46 Winder Speed Match Scale PID amplifier.
Range: Function:
1* [0.001 - 1000 ] Match the surface speeds of line and winder 37-53 Tension PID Anti Windup
at smallest core while running line at 100% Activate the anti-wind-up function in tension loop PID amplifier.
speed.
Option: Function:
[0] Disabled
37-47 Tension PID Profile
[1] * Enabled
Range: Function:
0% [0 - Allow scaling the tension loop PID output to
* 100 compensate for roll diameter. Ideally, the output
%] from the tension loop PID amplifier is halved each
time the diameter doubles, which is considered fully

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 119

 Parameter Descriptions VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

37-54 Winder Jog Reverse

Jog the winder in the reverse winding direction at the speed set
in parameter 37-26 Winder Jog Speed.
Option: Function:
[0] * No Function
[1] Jog reverse

37-55 Winder Jog Forward

4 4 Jog the winder in forward winding direction at the speed set in

parameter 37-26 Winder Jog Speed.
Option: Function:
[0] * No function
[1] Jog forward

37-56 New Diameter Select

Select partial roll diameter as the preset starting diameter when
the diameter reset is energized, rather than using 1 of the 2
preset core diameters.
Option: Function:
[0] * Core diameter
[1] Partial roll diameter

37-57 Tension On/Off

Turn the tension controller on or off.
Option: Function:
[0] * Off
[1] On

37-58 Core Select

Select 1 of the 2 preset core sizes.
Option: Function:
[0] * Core1 diameter
[1] Core2 diameter

37-59 Diameter Reset

Reset the diameter to a new value. If the new diameter selected
is energized, the partial core diameter value is used, otherwise
the diameter is reset to core 1 or core 2 values based on the
selected core.
Option: Function:
[0] * Off
[1] On

120 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5 Parameter Lists

5.1 Introduction 5.1.2 Conversion

5.1.1 Default Settings The various attributes of each parameter are shown in
Factory Setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole
Changes during operation numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to
True means that the parameter can be changed while the transfer decimals.
frequency converter is in operation, and false means that
the frequency converter must be stopped before a change Parameter 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion
can be made. factor of 0.1. To set the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, 5 5
2-set-up transfer the value 100. A conversion factor of 0.1 means
All set-ups: The parameter can be set individually in each that the value transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value
of the 2 set-ups, that is 1 single parameter can have 2 100 is therefore read as 10.0.
different data values.
1 set-up: Data value is the same in all set-ups. Examples:
0 s⇒conversion index 0
Data Description Type
0.00 s⇒conversion index -2
type
0 ms⇒conversion index -3
2 Integer 8 Int8 0.00 ms⇒conversion index -5
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
Conversion index Conversion factor
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
100 1
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
75 3600000
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
74 3600
9 Visible string VisStr
70 60
10 Byte string ByStr
67 1/60
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
6 1000000
35 Bit sequence BitSeq
5 100000
54 Time difference w/o date TimD
4 10000

Table 5.1 Data Type 3 1000

2 100
1 10
0 1
-1 0.1
-2 0.01
-3 0.001
-4 0.0001
-5 0.00001
-6 0.000001
-7 0.0000001

Table 5.2 Conversion Table

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 121

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes

+ indicates that the parameter is active in the mode.

- indicates that the parameter is inactive in the mode.

Parameter 1-10 Motor Construction AC motor

Parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle U/f mode VVC+
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
[0] Speed Open Loop + +
[1] Speed Closed Loop - +
[2] Torque Closed Loop - +

5 5 [3] Process Closed Loop

[4] Torque Open Loop
+
-
+
+
[6] Surface Winder + +
[7] Extended PID Speed OL + +
Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics - +1, 2, 3)
Parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction + +
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
+ +
(parameter 0-03 Regional Settings = [0] International)
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage + +
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency + +
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current + +
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed + +
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) - +
Parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) + +
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) + +
Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) + +
Parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) + +
Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles + +

Table 5.3 Active/Inactive Parameters

1) Constant torque.
2) Variable torque.
3) AEO.

Parameter 1-10 Motor Construction AC motor

Parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle U/f mode VVC+
Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed - +
Parameter 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] - +
Parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U + -
Parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F + -
Parameter 1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation - +
Parameter 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation - +
Parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation - +4)
Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant +5) +
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening + +
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant + +
Parameter 1-71 Start Delay + +
Parameter 1-72 Start Function + +
Parameter 1-73 Flying Start - +
Parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] - +
Parameter 1-76 Start Current - +

Table 5.4 Active/Inactive Parameters

4) Not used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics = VT.

122 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5) Part of resonance damping.

Parameter 1-10 Motor Construction AC motor

Parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle U/f mode VVC+
Parameter 1-80 Function at Stop + +
Parameter 1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] + +
Parameter 1-88 AC Brake Gain - +
Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection + +
Parameter 1-93 Thermistor Resource + +
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current + +
Parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current + +
Parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
+
+
+
+ 5 5
Parameter 2-10 Brake Function +6) +
Parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) + +
Parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) + +
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current - +
Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage Control + +
Parameter 2-19 Over-voltage Gain + +
Parameter 2-20 Release Brake Current + +
Parameter 2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] + +

Table 5.5 Active/Inactive Parameters

6) Not AC brake.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 123

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5.2 Parameter Lists

5.2.1 0-** Operation and Display

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
0-03 Regional Settings [0] International 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
0-04 Operating State at Power-up [0] Resume All set-ups TRUE – Uint8

5 5 0-06
0-07
GridType
Auto DC Braking
ExpressionLimit
[1] On
1 set-up
1 set-up
FALSE
FALSE
–
–
Uint8
Uint8
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
0-11 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
0-12 Link Setups [20] Linked All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups/Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-16 Application Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1602 All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small 1614 All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small 1610 All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1502 All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Custom Readout Unit [1] % 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
0-31 Custom Readout Min Value 0 CustomReadoutUnit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Int32
0-32 Custom Readout Max Value 100 CustomReadoutUnit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Int32
0-37 Display Text 1 [] 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[21]
0-38 Display Text 2 [] 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[26]
0-39 Display Text 3 [] 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[26]
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16

124 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.2.2 1-** Load and Motor

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Open Loop All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
1-01 Motor Control Principle [1] VVC+ All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
1-03 Torque Characteristics [0] Constant torque All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
1-06 Clockwise Direction [0] Normal 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
1-08 Motor Control Bandwidth ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
1-1* Motor Selection
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
5 5
1-14 Damping Gain 120% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-17 Voltage filter time const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
1-29 Automatic Motor Adaption (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data I
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-4* Adv. Motor Data II
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-42 Motor Cable Length 50 m All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-43 Motor Cable Length Feet 164 ft All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
1-46 Position Detection Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-48 Current at Min Inductance for d-axis 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-49 Current at Min Inductance for q-axis 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz] 1 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant 0.1 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Dampening 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant 0.005 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 125

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode [0] Rotor Detection All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32

5 5 1-78
1-79
Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz]
Compressor Start Max Time to Trip
0 Hz
5s
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
-1
Uint16
Uint8
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [0] No protection All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
1-93 Thermistor Source [0] None All set-ups FALSE – Uint8

5.2.3 2-** Brakes

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold/Motor Preheat Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-01 DC Brake Current 50% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02 DC Braking Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-06 Parking Current 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-07 Parking Time 3s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function [0] Off All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-14 Brake voltage reduce 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
2-16 AC Brake, Max current 100% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-17 Over-voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
2-19 Over-voltage Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay 0.0 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-24 Stop Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-25 Brake Release Time 0s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-3* Adv. Mech Brake
2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain 0.015 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time 200.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time 10.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-39 Mech. Brake w/ dir. Change [0] OFF All set-ups TRUE – Uint8

126 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.2.4 3-** Reference/Ramps

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
3-0* Reference Limits
3-00 Reference Range [0] Min - Max All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-02 Minimum Reference 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-03 Maximum Reference ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
5 5
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] 5 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-13 Reference Site [0] Linked to Hand / Auto All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-15 Reference 1 Source [1] Analog Input 53 All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-16 Reference 2 Source [2] Analog Input 54 All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-17 Reference 3 Source [11] Local bus reference All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-5* Ramp 2
3-50 Ramp 2 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-6* Ramp 3
3-60 Ramp 3 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-7* Ramp 4
3-70 Ramp 4 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay 1000 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 127

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5.2.5 4-** Limits/Warnings

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction [2] Both directions All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] 65 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

5 5 4-18
4-19
Current Limit
Max Output Frequency
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
FALSE
0
-1
Uint16
Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
4-22 Break Away Boost [0] Off All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
4-27 Torque Limit Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
4-28 Speed Limit Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
4-3* Motor Fb Monitor
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 20 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout 0.05 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-4* Adj. Warnings 2
4-40 Warning Freq. Low ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-41 Warning Freq. High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-42 Adjustable Temperature Warning 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-54 Warning Reference Low -4999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 4999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-56 Warning Feedback Low -4999 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-57 Warning Feedback High 4999 ProcessCtrlUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function [1] On All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

5.2.6 5-** Digital In/Out

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input [10] Reversing All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [14] Jog All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8

128 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [16] Preset ref bit 0 All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-16 Terminal 31 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-34 On Delay, Digital Output 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-35 Off Delay, Digital Output 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-4* Relays
5-40
5-41
Function Relay
On Delay, Relay
ExpressionLimit
0.01 s
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
–
-2
Uint8
Uint16
5 5
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 4 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 32000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 4 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 32000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-6* Pulse Output
5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq 27 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq 29 5000 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24 V Encoder Input
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out 27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-94 Pulse Out 27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out 29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-96 Pulse Out 29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

5.2.7 6-** Analog In/Out

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 53
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Uint16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Uint16
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 129

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
6-19 Terminal 53 mode [1] Voltage mode 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
6-2* Analog Input 54
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 4 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Uint16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Uint16
6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32

5 5 6-26
6-29
Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
Terminal 54 mode
0.01 s
[1] Voltage mode
All set-ups
1 set-up
TRUE
TRUE
-2
–
Uint16
Uint8
6-7* Analog/Digital Output 45
6-70 Terminal 45 Mode [0] 0-20 mA All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-71 Terminal 45 Analog Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-72 Terminal 45 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-73 Terminal 45 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-74 Terminal 45 Output Max Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-76 Terminal 45 Output Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
6-9* Analog/Digital Output 42
6-90 Terminal 42 Mode [0] 0-20 mA All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-91 Terminal 42 Analog Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-92 Terminal 42 Digital Output [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
6-93 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-94 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100% All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
6-96 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

5.2.8 7-** Controllers

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source [20] None All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain 0.015 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-03 Speed PID Integral Time 8 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time 30 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
7-1* Torque PID Ctrl.
7-12 Torque PID Proportional Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PID Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16

130 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 9999 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
7-4* Adv. Process PID I
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset [0] No All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-42
7-43
Process PID Output Pos. Clamp
Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
100%
100%
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Int16
Int16
5 5
7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref. 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-48 PCD Feed Forward 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-5* Adv. Process PID II
7-50 Process PID Extended PID [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-6* Feedback Conversion
7-60 Feedback 1 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
7-62 Feedback 2 Conversion [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE – Uint8

5.2.9 8-** Communications and Options

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
8-0* General Settings
8-00 Option A warning control [0] None All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-01 Control Site [0] Digital and ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-02 Control Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-03 Control Timeout Time 1s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint16
8-04 Control Timeout Function [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW [1] Profile default All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-19 Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-33 Parity/Stop Bits ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 0.01 s 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Maximum Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Maximum Inter-char delay 0.025 s 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 131

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8

5 5 8-55
8-56
Set-up Select
Preset Reference Select
[3] Logic OR
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
–
–
Uint8
Uint8
8-57 PROFIdrive OFF2 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-58 PROFIdrive OFF3 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
8-7* Protocol Firmware Version
8-79 Protocol Firmware version ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE -2 Uint16
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-83 Slave Error Count 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-84 Slave Messages Sent 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-85 Slave Timeout Errors 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-88 Reset FC port Diagnostics [0] Do not reset 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
8-9* Bus Feedback
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed 200 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16

5.2.10 9-** PROFIdrive

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
9-00 Setpoint 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-19 Drive Unit System Number 1037 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-22 Telegram Selection [100] None 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE – Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 1 set-up FALSE – Uint16
9-28 Process Control [1] Enable cyclic master 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 PROFIBUS Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-63 Actual Baud Rate [255] No baudrate found All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[0]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2

132 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
9-70 Programming Set-up [9] Active Set-up 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
9-71 PROFIBUS Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
9-72 PROFIBUSDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
9-75 DO Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-81 Defined Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-82 Defined Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-83 Defined Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-84
9-90
Defined Parameters (5)
Changed Parameters (1)
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
FALSE
0
0
Uint16
Uint16
5 5
9-91 Changed Parameters (2) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-92 Changed Parameters (3) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-93 Changed Parameters (4) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-94 Changed Parameters (5) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-99 PROFIBUS Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

5.2.11 12-** Ethernet

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
12-0* IP Settings
12-00 IP Address Assignment [10] DCP 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-01 IP Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-02 Subnet Mask 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-03 Default Gateway 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-04 DHCP Server 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-05 Lease Expires 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-06 Name Servers 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-07 Domain Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-08 Host Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-09 Physical Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[17]
12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
12-10 Link Status [0] No Link 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-11 Link Duration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-12 Auto Negotiation [1] On 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-13 Link Speed [0] None 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-14 Link Duplex [1] Full Duplex 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-8* Other Ethernet Services
12-80 FTP Server [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-81 HTTP Server [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-82 SMTP Service [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-89 Transparent Socket Channel Port 4000 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services
12-90 Cable Diagnostic [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-91 Auto Cross Over [1] Enabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-92 IGMP Snooping [1] Enabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-93 Cable Error Length 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection -1 % 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int8
12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter [0] Broadcast only 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 133

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
12-96 Port Config ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
12-98 Interface Counters 4000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-99 Media Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32

5.2.12 13-** Smart Logic Control

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index

5 5 13-0* SLC Settings

operation

13-00 SL Controller Mode [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8

13-01 Start Event [39] Start command 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-02 Stop Event [40] Drive stopped 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator [1] Approx.Equal (~) 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer 0s 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 [0] False 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 [0] False 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 [0] False 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8

5.2.13 14-** Special Functions

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during Conversion Type
operation index
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-07 Dead Time Compensation Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-08 Damping Gain Factor ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-09 Dead Time Bias Current Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault 342 V All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
14-17 Fast Mains Phase Loss Level 300 % 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
14-18 Fast Mains Phase Loss Min Power 10 % 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
14-2* Reset Functions
14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8

134 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change during Conversion Type
operation index
14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-27 Action At Inverter Fault [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
5 5
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation 66% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-44 d-axis current optimization for IPM 100% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [2] Grid Type 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-51 DC-Link Voltage Compensation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [5] Constant-on mode 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-6* Auto Derate
14-61 Function at Inverter Overload [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-63 Min Switch Frequency [2] 2.0 kHz 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
Dead Time Compensation Zero
14-64 Current Level [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Speed Derate Dead Time Compen-
14-65 sation ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-8* Options
[0] Protect Option
14-89 Option Detection Config. 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
14-9* Fault Settings
14-90 Fault Level [3] Trip Lock All set-ups TRUE - Uint8

5.2.14 15-** Drive Information

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h 1 set-up TRUE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h 1 set-up TRUE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh 1 set-up TRUE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
15-3* Alarm Log
15-30 Alarm Log: Error Code 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
15-31 InternalFaultReason 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[7]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[20]

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 135

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-44 Ordered TypeCode 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[41]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-46 Drive Ordering No 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[9]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[21]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[21]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[21]
15-51 Drive Serial Number 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[13]

5 5 15-53 Power Card Serial Number

15-6* Option Ident
0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[21]

15-60 Option Mounted ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]

15-61 Option SW Version ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
15-97 Application Type 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
15-98 Drive Identification 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[56]
15-99 Parameter Metadata 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16

5.2.15 16-** Data Readouts

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference [%] 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Int16
16-09 Custom Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
16-14 Motor current 0A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint16
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 °C 1 set-up TRUE 100 Int8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current 0A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16

136 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation
16-37 Inv. Max. Current 0A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 °C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint16
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Int16

16-52 Feedback[Unit] 0 ProcessCtrlUnit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32

16-53 Digi Pot Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int16
16-57 Feedback [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
5 5
16-61 Terminal 53 Setting ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
16-63 Terminal 54 Setting ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
16-64 Analog Input AI54 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 mA 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
16-66 Digital Output 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
16-67 Pulse Input 29[Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Pulse Input 33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output 27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output 29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
16-79 Analog Output AO45 0 mA 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 1084 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 uint16
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-95 Ext. Status Word 2 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
16-97 Alarm Word 3 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32

5.2.16 17-** Feedback Options

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation

17-1* Inc.Enc.Interface
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5 V TTL) All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-5* Resolver Interface
17-50 Poles 2 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8
17-51 Input Voltage 7V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 137

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversion Type
during index
operation

17-52 Input Frequency 10 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8

17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution [0] Disabled 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE – Uint8
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE – Uint8

5 5 5.2.17 18-** Data Readouts 2

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change Conversion Type

No. # during index
operation
18-8* Center Winder Readout
18-81 Tension PID Output 0 Hz 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32

18-82 Center Winder Output 0 Hz 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32

18-83 Line Speed 0 Hz 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32
18-84 Diameter 0% 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int32
18-85 Tapered Tension Set Point 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Int32
18-86 Tension Feedback 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Int32
18-9* PID Readouts
18-90 Process PID Error 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-91 Process PID Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-92 Process PID Clamped Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16

5.2.18 21-** Ext. Closed Loop

Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up Change Conversion Type

No. # during index
operation
21-0* Ext. CL Autotuning
21-09 Extended PID Enable [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-1* Ext. CL 1 Ref./Fb.
21-11 Ext. 1 Minimum Reference 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-12 Ext. 1 Maximum Reference 100 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-13 Ext. 1 Reference Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-14 Ext. 1 Feedback Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-15 Ext. 1 Setpoint 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-17 Ext. 1 Reference [Unit] 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-18 Ext. 1 Feedback [Unit] 0 ExtPID1Unit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
21-19 Ext. 1 Output [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Ext. CL 1 PID
21-20 Ext. 1 Normal/Inverse Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
21-21 Ext. 1 Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-22 Ext. 1 Integral Time 10000 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
21-23 Ext. 1 Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
21-24 Ext. 1 Dif. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16

138 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.2.19 22-** Application Functions

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
22-4* Sleep Mode
22-40 Minimum Run Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-41 Minimum Sleep Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
22-43 Wake-Up Speed [Hz] 10 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
22-44 Wake-Up Ref./FB Diff 10% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-45 Setpoint Boost 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
22-46
22-47
Maximum Boost Time
Sleep Speed [Hz]
60 s
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
-1
Uint16
Uint16
5 5
22-6* Broken Belt Detection
22-60 Broken Belt Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE – Uint8
22-61 Broken Belt Torque 10% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
22-62 Broken Belt Delay 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16

5.2.20 30-** Special Features

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust

30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s] 0.10 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint8

5.2.21 32-** Motion Control Basic Settings

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
32-11 User Unit Denominator 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
32-12 User Unit Numerator 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32

32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 2000000 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32

32-80 Maximum Allowed Velocity 1500 RPM 1 set-up FALSE 67 Uint16

32-81 Motion Ctrl Quick Stop Ramp 1000 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint32

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 139

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

5.2.22 33-** Motion Control Adv. Settings

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation

33-00 Force Home [0] Home not forced 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
33-01 Home Offset 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int32
33-02 Home Ramp Time 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
33-03 Homing Velocity 100 RPM 1 set-up TRUE 67 Int16
33-04 Homing Type [1] Reverse no index 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
33-41 Negative Software Limit -500000 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int32
5 5 33-42 Positive Software Limit 500000 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int32
33-43 Negative Software Limit Active [0] Inactive 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
33-44 Positive Software Limit Active [0] Inactive 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
33-47 Target Position Window 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16

5.2.23 34-** Motion Control Data Readouts

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
34-0* PCD Write Par.

34-01 PCD 1 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-02 PCD 2 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-03 PCD 3 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-04 PCD 4 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-05 PCD 5 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-06 PCD 6 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-07 PCD 7 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-08 PCD 8 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-09 PCD 9 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-10 PCD 10 Write For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-2* PCD Read Par.
34-21 PCD 1 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-22 PCD 2 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-23 PCD 3 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-24 PCD 4 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-25 PCD 5 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-26 PCD 6 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-27 PCD 7 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-28 PCD 8 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-29 PCD 9 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-30 PCD 10 Read For Application 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-5* Process Data
34-50 Actual Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-56 Track Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32

140 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Parameter Lists Programming Guide

5.2.24 37-** Application Settings

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation

37-0* Application Mode

37-00 Application Mode [0] Drive mode 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-1* Position Control
37-01 Pos. Feedback Source [0] 24 V Encoder 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-02 Pos. Target 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Int32
37-03 Pos. Type [0] Absolute 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-04 Pos. Velocity 100 RPM 1 set-up FALSE 67 Uint16 5 5
37-05 Pos. Ramp Up Time 5000 ms 1 set-up FALSE -3 Uint32
37-06 Pos. Ramp Down Time 5000 ms 1 set-up FALSE -3 Uint32
37-07 Pos. Auto Brake Ctrl [1] Enable 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8

37-08 Pos. Hold Delay 0 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint32

37-09 Pos. Coast Delay 200 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
37-10 Pos. Brake Delay 200 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
37-11 Pos. Brake Wear Limit 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
37-12 Pos. PID Anti Windup [1] Enable 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-13 Pos. PID Output Clamp 1000 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
37-14 Pos. Ctrl. Source [0] DI 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-15 Pos. Direction Block [0] No Blocking 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-16 Pos. Power Recovery [1] Enable 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-17 Pos. Ctrl Fault Behaviour [0] Ramp Down&Brake 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-18 Pos. Ctrl Fault Reason [0] No Fault 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-19 Pos. New Index 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-2* Center Winder
37-20 Winder Mode Selection [0] Wind 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-21 Tension Set Point 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint16
37-22 Taper Set Point 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Int16
37-23 Partial Roll Diameter Value 5% 1 set-up FALSE -3 Uint32
37-24 Core1 Diameter 5% 1 set-up FALSE -3 Uint32
37-25 Core2 Diameter 5% 1 set-up FALSE -3 Uint32
37-26 Winder Jog Speed 0% 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
37-27 TLD Low Limit 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint16
37-28 TLD High Limit 0% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint16
37-29 TLD Timer 0.001 s 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
37-30 TLDOnDelay [1] Enabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-31 Diameter Limit Detector 100% 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint32
[0] Set diameter when
37-32 Initial Diameter Measurement diameter reset 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-33 Diameter Measurement Input [0] No Function 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-34 Reading at Core 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Int16
37-35 Reading at Full Roll 0V 1 set-up TRUE -2 Int16
37-36 Tension Set Point Input [0] Par.3721 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-37 Taper Set Point Input [0] Par.3722 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-38 Tension Feedback Input [0] No Function 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-39 Tension Feedback Type [0] Load cell 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
[1] Parameter 3754~3759
37-40 Center Winder Cmd Src control the functions 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-41 Diameter Change Rate 0.001% 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint8
37-42 Tapered Tension Change Rate 0.1% 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint8

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 141

 Parameter Lists VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 2-set-up Change Conversio Type
during n index
operation
37-43 Diameter Calculator Min Speed 0% 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
37-44 Line Acceleration Feed Forward 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE -3 Int16
37-45 Line Speed Source [0] No function 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-46 Winder Speed Match Scale 1 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -3 Uint32
37-47 Tension PID Profile 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
37-48 Tension PID Proportional Gain 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
37-49 Tension PID Derivate Time 0s 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
37-50 Tension PID Integral Time 501 s 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32

5 5 37-51
37-52
Tension PID Out Limit
Tension PID Der Gain Limit
0%
5 N/A
1 set-up
1 set-up
TRUE
TRUE
-3
-1
Uint32
Uint16
37-53 Tension PID Anti Windup [1] Enabled 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-54 Winder Jog Reverse [0] No Function 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-55 Winder Jog Forward [0] No function 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-56 New Diameter Select [0] Core diameter 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-57 Tension On/Off [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE – Uint8
37-58 Core Select [0] Core1 diameter 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8
37-59 Diameter Reset [0] Off 1 set-up FALSE – Uint8

142 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

6 Troubleshooting

6.1 Warnings and Alarms 6.1.3 Warning/alarm Messages

When the frequency converter fault circuitry detects a fault The LEDs on the front of the frequency converter and a
condition or a pending fault, a warning or alarm is issued. code in the display signal a warning or an alarm.
A flashing display on the LCP indicates an alarm or
warning condition and the associated number code on line
LED indication
2. Sometimes a warning precedes an alarm.
Warning Yellow
Alarm Flashing red
6.1.1 Alarms
Table 6.1 Control Terminals and Associated Parameter
An alarm causes the frequency converter to trip (suspend A warning indicates a condition that requires attention, or
operation). The frequency converter has 3 trip conditions,
which are shown in line 1:
a trend that would eventually require attention. A warning 6 6
remains active until the cause is no longer present. Under
some circumstances, motor operation could continue.
Trip (auto restart)
The frequency converter is programmed to restart An alarm triggers a trip. The trip removes power to the
automatically after the fault is removed. The number of motor. It can be reset after the condition has been cleared
automatic reset attempts can be continuous or limited to a by pressing [Reset], or through a digital input (parameter
programmed number of attempts. If the selected number group 5–1* Digital Inputs). The event that caused an alarm
of automatic reset attempts is exceeded, the trip condition cannot damage the frequency converter, or cause a
changes to trip (reset). dangerous condition. Alarms must be reset to restart
Trip (reset) operation once their cause has been rectified.
Requires resetting of the frequency converter before
operation after a fault is cleared. To reset the frequency The reset can be done in 3 ways:
converter manually, press [Reset] or use a digital input, or
a fieldbus command. For NLCP, stop and reset are the same • Press [Reset].
key, [Off/Reset]. If [Off/Reset] is used to reset the frequency
converter, press [Start] to initiate a run command in either • A digital reset input.
hand-on mode or auto-on mode. • Serial communication/optional fieldbus reset
signal.
Trip lock (disc>mains)
Disconnect the mains AC input power to the frequency NOTICE
converter long enough for the display to go blank. Remove After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to
the fault condition and reapply power. Following power-up, restart the motor.
the fault indication changes to trip (reset) and allows for
manual, digital, or fieldbus reset.
A warning precedes an alarm.

6.1.2 Warnings A trip lock is an action when an alarm occurs which can
damage the frequency converter or connected equipment.
During a warning, the frequency converter remains Power is removed from the motor. A trip lock can only be
operational, although the warning flashes for as long as reset after a power cycle has cleared the condition. Once
the condition exists. The frequency converter could, the problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
however, reduce the warning condition. For example, if the flashing until the frequency converter is reset.
warning shown was warning 12, Torque Limit, the frequency
converter would reduce speed to compensate for the
The warnings and alarms are explained in Table 6.2.
overcurrent condition. Sometimes, if the condition is not
corrected or worsens, an alarm condition is activated and
the frequency converter stops output to the motor
terminals. Line 1 identifies the warning in plain language,
and line 2 identifies the warning number.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 143

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Number Description Warning Alarm Trip lock Cause

Signal on terminal 53 or 54 is less than 50% of value set
in parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,
2 Live zero error X X – parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage, and
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current.
No motor has been connected to the output of the
3 No motor X – –
frequency converter, or 1 motor phase is missing.
Missing phase on supply side, or the voltage imbalance
4 Mains phase loss1) X X X
is too high. Check the supply voltage.
7 DC overvoltage1) X X – Intermediate circuit voltage exceeds limit.
Intermediate circuit voltage drops below the voltage
8 DC undervoltage1) X X –
warning low limit.
9 Inverter overloaded X X – More than 100% load for too long.

6 6 10 Motor ETR overtemperature X X –

Motor is too hot due to more than 100% load for too
long.
Motor thermistor overtem-
11 X X – Thermistor or thermistor connection is disconnected.
perature
Torque exceeds value set in either parameter 4-16 Torque
12 Torque limit X X – Limit Motor Mode or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit
Generator Mode.
Inverter peak current limit is exceeded. For J1–J6 units,
13 Overcurrent X X X if this alarm occurs on power-up, check whether power
cables are mistakenly connected to the motor terminals.
14 Earth fault – X X Discharge from output phases to ground.
Short circuit in motor or on motor terminals. For J7
units, if this alarm occurs on power-up, check whether
16 Short circuit – X X
power cables are mistakenly connected to the motor
terminals.
17 Control word timeout X X – No communication to frequency converter.
18 Start failed – X – –
Brake resistor is short-circuited, thus the brake function
25 Brake resistor short-circuited – X X
is disconnected.
The power transmitted to the brake resistor over the
last 120 s exceeds the limit. Possible corrections:
26 Brake overload X X –
Decrease brake energy via lower speed or longer ramp
time.
Brake IGBT/Brake chopper Brake transistor is short-circuited, thus brake function is
27 – X X
short-circuited disconnected.
28 Brake check – X – Brake resistor is not connected/working.
30 U phase loss – X X Motor phase U is missing. Check the phase.
31 V phase loss – X X Motor phase V is missing. Check the phase.
32 W phase loss – X X Motor phase W is missing. Check the phase.
34 Fieldbus fault X X – PROFIBUS communication issues have occurred.
35 Option fault – X – Fieldbus or option B detects internal faults.
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage
to the frequency converter is less than the value set in
36 Mains failure X X – parameter 14-11 Mains Fault Voltage Level, and
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is NOT set to [0] No
Function.
38 Internal fault – X X Contact the local Danfoss supplier.
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove
40 Overload T27 X – –
short-circuit connection.
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove
41 Overload T29 X – –
short-circuit connection.

144 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Number Description Warning Alarm Trip lock Cause

46 Gate drive voltage fault – X X –
47 24 V supply low X X X 24 V DC may be overloaded.
50 AMA calibration – X – –
51 AMA check Unom and Inom – X – Wrong setting for motor voltage and/or motor current.
52 AMA low Inom – X – Motor current is too low. Check the settings.
The power size of the motor is too large for the AMA to
53 AMA big motor – X –
operate.
The power size of the motor is too small for the AMA to
54 AMA small motor – X –
operate.
The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
55 AMA parameter range – X –
acceptable range. AMA does not run.
56 AMA interrupt – X – The AMA is interrupted.
57 AMA timeout – X – –
58 AMA internal – X – Contact Danfoss.
6 6
59 Current limit X X – Frequency converter overload.

60 External Interlock – X – –
The difference between the speed reference and the
61 Feedback error X X –
feedback exceeds the limit.
Actual motor current has not exceeded release brake
63 Mechanical brake low – X –
current within start delay time window.
The cutout temperature of the control card is 80 °C (176
65 Control card temp X X X
°F).
The cutout temperature of the power card has exceeded
69 Power card temp X X X
the upper limit.
70 Illegal FC config – X X –
Frequency converter initialized
80 – X – All parameter settings are initialized to default settings.
to default value
Occurs in IT mains when the frequency converter coasts
and the DC voltage is higher than 830 V. Energy on DC-
87 Auto DC brake X – –
link is consumed by the motor. This function can be
enabled/disabled in parameter 0-07 Auto DC Braking.
90 Feedback monitor X X – A feedback fault is detected by option B.
95 Broken belt X X – –
99 Locked rotor – X – –
Flow/pressure information
101 – X X –
missing
120 Position control fault – X – –
124 Tension limit – X – –
126 Motor rotating – X – –
Try to start PM motor which is rotating at an abnormal
127 Back EMF too high2) X – –
high speed.
250 New spare part – X X –
251 New type code – X X –

Table 6.2 Warnings and Alarms Code List

1) These faults may be caused by mains distortions. Installing a Danfoss line filter may rectify this problem.
2) For enclosure size J7, the warning can also be caused by high UDC voltage.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 145

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

For diagnosis, read out the alarm words, warning words, and extended status words.

Alarm word Alarm word Warning word Extended

Alarm word Warning word Extended
2 3 2 status word
(parameter 1 (parameter 16- status word 2
Bit Hex Dec (parameter (parameter 1 (parameter 16 (parameter 16-
6-90 Alarm 92 Warning (parameter 16-95 Ext
16-91 Alarm 6-97 Alarm -93 Warning 94 Ext. Status
Word) Word) . Status Word 2)
Word 2) Word 3) Word 2) Word)

000000
0 1 Brake check Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ramping Off
01
000000 Pwr. card Gate drive Pwr. card
1 2 Reserved Reserved AMA tuning Hand/Auto
02 temp voltage fault temp

6 6 2
000000
04
4 Earth fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Start CW/CCW
PROFIBUS OFF1
active
000000 Ctrl. card PROFIBUS OFF2
3 8 Reserved Reserved Ctrl. card temp Reserved Slowdown
08 temp active
000000 Ctrl. word Illegal FC PROFIBUS OFF3
4 16 Reserved Ctrl. word TO Reserved Catch up
10 TO config active
000000
5 32 Overcurrent Reserved Reserved Overcurrent Reserved Feedback high Reserved
20
000000
6 64 Torque limit Reserved Reserved Torque limit Reserved Feedback low Reserved
40
000000 Motor Th. Output current
7 128 Reserved Reserved Motor Th. over Reserved Control ready
80 over high
000001 Motor ETR Motor ETR Output current Frequency converter
8 256 Broken belt Reserved Broken belt
00 over over low ready
000002 Inverter Output freq.
9 512 Reserved Reserved Inverter overld. Reserved Quick stop
00 overld. high
000004 DC Output freq.
10 1024 Start failed Reserved DC undervolt. Reserved DC brake
00 undervolt. low
000008
11 2048 DC overvolt. Reserved Reserved DC overvolt. Reserved Brake check OK Stop
00
000010 External
12 4096 Short circuit Reserved Reserved Reserved Braking max Latched
00 interlock
000020
13 8192 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Braking Reserved
00
000040 Mains ph.
14 16384 Reserved Reserved Mains ph. loss Reserved Reserved Freeze output
00 loss
000080
15 32768 AMA not OK Reserved Reserved No motor Auto DC brake OVC active Reserved
00
000100 Live zero
16 65536 Reserved Reserved Live zero error Reserved AC brake Jog
00 error
000200
17 131072 Internal fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00
000400 Brake Brake resistor
18 262144 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Start
00 overload power limit
000800
19 524288 U phase loss Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reference high Reserved
00
001000 Option
20 1048576 V phase loss Reserved Reserved Overload T27 Reference low Start delay
00 detection
002000
21 2097152 W phase loss Option fault Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Sleep
00

146 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Alarm word Alarm word Warning word Extended

Alarm word Warning word Extended
2 3 2 status word
(parameter 1 (parameter 16- status word 2
Bit Hex Dec (parameter (parameter 1 (parameter 16 (parameter 16-
6-90 Alarm 92 Warning (parameter 16-95 Ext
16-91 Alarm 6-97 Alarm -93 Warning 94 Ext. Status
Word) Word) . Status Word 2)
Word 2) Word 3) Word 2) Word)

004000 Fieldbus
22 4194304 Locked rotor Reserved Fieldbus fault Reserved Reserved Sleep boost
00 fault
008000 24 V supply Position ctrl. 24 V supply
23 8388608 Reserved Reserved Reserved Running
00 low fault low
010000 Tension
24 16777216 Mains failure Reserved Mains failure Reserved Reserved Bypass
00 Limit

25
020000
00
33554432 Reserved Current limit Reserved Current limit Reserved Reserved Reserved 6 6
040000 Brake
26 67108864 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved External interlock
00 resistor
080000 13421772
27 Brake IGBT Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00 8
100000 26843545 Option Feedback
28 Reserved Encoder loss Reserved Reserved FlyStart active
00 6 change fault
Frequency
200000 53687091 Back EMF too Heat sink clean
29 converter Encoder loss Reserved Reserved Reserved
00 2 high warning
initialized
400000 10737418
30 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00 24
800000 21474836 Mech. brake
31 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Database busy Reserved
00 48 low

Table 6.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word, and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words and extended status Troubleshooting

words can be accessed via fieldbus or optional fieldbus for • Check the supply voltage and supply currents to
diagnosis. the frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in If the DC-link voltage exceeds the limit, the frequency
parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on 1 converter trips after a time.
of the analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum Troubleshooting
value programmed for that input. Broken wiring or faulty
device sending the signal can cause this condition.
• Extend the ramp time.
Troubleshooting
• Change the ramp type.

• Check connections on all the analog input WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage

terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for If the DC-link voltage (DC-link) drops below the
signals, terminal 55 common. undervoltage limit, the frequency converter trips after a
fixed time delay. The time delay varies with unit size.
• Check that the frequency converter programming
and switch settings match the analog signal type. Troubleshooting
• Check that the supply voltage matches the
• Perform the input terminal signal test. frequency converter voltage.
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains
• Perform the input voltage test.

voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears • Perform the soft charge circuit test.
for a fault in the input rectifier. Options are programmed in WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload
parameter 14-12 Response to Mains Imbalance. The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an
overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
electronic, thermal inverter protection issues a warning at

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 147

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

90% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The the terminal to use in parameter 1-93 Thermistor
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is Resource.
below 0%.
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit
The fault occurs when the frequency converter has run The torque has exceeded the value in
with more than 100% overload for too long. parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode or the value in
Troubleshooting parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
• Compare the output current shown on the LCP Parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this
with the frequency converter rated current. warning from a warning-only condition to a warning
followed by an alarm.
• Compare the output current shown on the LCP
with measured motor current. Troubleshooting
• Show the thermal frequency converter load on • If the motor torque limit is exceeded during
ramp-up, extend the ramp-up time.
the LCP and monitor the value. When running
above the frequency converter continuous • If the generator torque limit is exceeded during
current rating, the counter increases. When ramp-down, extend the ramp-down time.
6 6 running below the frequency converter
• If torque limit occurs while running, increase the
continuous current rating, the counter decreases. torque limit. Make sure that the system can
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature operate safely at a higher torque.
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter
• Check the application for excessive current draw
on the motor.
issues a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches
100% in parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
occurs when the motor runs with more than 100% The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
overload for too long. rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 5 s,
then the frequency converter trips and issues an alarm.
Troubleshooting Shock loading or fast acceleration with high-inertia loads
• Check for motor overheating. can cause this fault.
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded. Troubleshooting
• Check that the motor current set in • Remove power and check if the motor shaft can
parameter 1-24 Motor Current is correct. be turned.
• Ensure that motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25 • Check that the motor size matches the frequency
is set correctly. converter.
• Running AMA in parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor • Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct motor
Adaptation (AMA) tunes the frequency converter data.
to the motor more accurately and reduces ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
thermal loading. There is current from the output phases to ground, either
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp in the cable between the frequency converter and the
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select motor, or in the motor itself.
whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an Troubleshooting
alarm in parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
• Remove power to the frequency converter and
Troubleshooting repair the ground fault.
• Check for motor overheating. • Check for ground faults in the motor by
• Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded. measuring the resistance to ground of the motor
cables and the motor with a megohmmeter.
• When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
thermistor is connected correctly between either ALARM 16, Short circuit
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage.
• Remove power to the frequency converter and
repair the short circuit.
Check that parameter 1-93 Thermistor Resource
selects terminal 53 or 54. WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
• When using terminal 18, 19, 31, 32, or 33 (digital The warning is only active when parameter 8-04 Control
inputs), check that the thermistor is connected Word Timeout Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
correctly between the digital input terminal used
(digital input PNP only) and terminal 50. Select

148 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

If parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
Stop and Trip, a warning appears. The frequency converter Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
then ramps down until it trips, while giving an alarm. motor is missing.
Parameter 8-03 Control Timeout Time could possibly be Troubleshooting
increased.
• Remove power from the frequency converter and
Troubleshooting check motor phase U.
• Check connections on the serial communication ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
cable. Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
• Increase parameter 8-03 Control Word Timeout motor is missing.
Time. Troubleshooting
• Check the operation of the communication • Remove power from the frequency converter and
equipment. check motor phase V.
• Verify a proper installation based on EMC ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
requirements.
ALARM 18, Start failed
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing. 6 6
The speed cannot exceed the value set in Troubleshooting
parameter 1-78 Compressor Start Max Speed [Hz] during • Remove power from the frequency converter and
start within the allowed time, which is set in check motor phase W.
parameter 1-79 Compressor Start Max Time to Trip. The WARNING/ALARM 34, communication fault
alarm may be caused by a blocked motor. The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit working.
The brake resistor is monitored during start-up. If a short ALARM 38, Internal fault
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the alarm When an internal fault occurs, a code number is shown.
appears. The frequency converter is tripped.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting See Table 6.4 for the causes and solutions for different
• Remove the power to the frequency converter internal faults. If the fault persists, contact the Danfoss
and check the connection of the brake resistor. supplier or service department for assistance.
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as Fault
Cause Solution
a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The number
calculation is based on the DC-link voltage and the brake Upgrade the software in the
Power board
resistor value set in parameter 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm). 140–142 frequency converter to the
EEPROM data error
The warning is active when the dissipated braking power latest version.
is higher than the value set in parameter 2-12 Brake Power The firmware in the
Upgrade the software in the
Limit (kW). The frequency converter trips if the warning frequency converter
176 frequency converter to the
persists for 1200 s. does not match the
latest version.
frequency converter.
Troubleshooting
Upgrade the software in the
• Decrease brake energy via lower speed or longer 256
Flash ROM
frequency converter to the
ramp time. checksum error
latest version.
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault Firmware mismatch
The brake transistor is monitored during start-up. If a short Upgrade the software in the
between the control
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled, and an alarm 2304 frequency converter to the
card and the power
is issued. The frequency converter is tripped. latest version.
card.
Troubleshooting Upgrade the software in the
• Remove the power to the frequency converter Communication
frequency converter to the
and remove the brake resistor. latest version. If the alarm
error between the
2560 occurs again, check the
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed control card and the
connection between the
The brake resistor is not connected or not working. power card.
control card and the power
Troubleshooting card.
• Check if brake resistor is connected or it is too Upgrade the software in the
large for the frequency converter. Serial flash version
3840 frequency converter to the
error
latest version.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 149

 Troubleshooting VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Fault Troubleshooting
Cause Solution
number • Check the setting in parameter 1-24 Motor Current.
Upgrade the software in the ALARM 53, AMA motor too big
frequency converter to the The motor is too large for the AMA to operate.
Frequency converter
4608 latest version. If the alarm
power size error ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
occurs again, contact a Danfoss
supplier. The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
The hardware version of the ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range
Option hardware option or the fieldbus variant is The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
5632
version error not compatible with the acceptable range. The AMA does not run.
frequency converter software.
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
The software version of the The AMA is manually interrupted.
option or the fieldbus variant is
not compatible with the ALARM 57, AMA internal fault
Option software Try to restart the AMA again. Repeated restarts can
5888 frequency converter software.
6 6 version error
Change either the fieldbus overheat the motor.
software or the frequency ALARM 58, Internal fault
converter software. Contact a Danfoss supplier.
The option is not Check if the product supports
6144 WARNING 59, Current limit
supported this option.
The current is higher than the value in
Option combination
6400 Remove the option. parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
error
Power cycle the frequency
Troubleshooting
converter. If the alarm occurs • Ensure that motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25
Other Other internal faults is set correctly.
again, contact a Danfoss
supplier. • Possibly increase the current limit.

Table 6.4 Internal Fault List • Be sure that the system can operate safely at a
higher limit.
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27 ALARM 60, External interlock
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove the A digital input signal indicates a fault condition external to
short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-00 Digital I/O the frequency converter. An external interlock has
Mode and parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode. commanded the frequency converter to trip.
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29 Troubleshooting
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove the • Clear the external fault condition.
short circuit connection. Check parameter 5-00 Digital I/O
Mode and parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
• To resume normal operation, apply 24 V DC to
the terminal programmed for external interlock.
ALARM 46, Power card supply
The supply for the gate drive on the power card is out of
• Reset the frequency converter.

range. It is generated by the switch mode supply (SMPS) WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
on the power card. An error between calculated speed and speed
measurement from feedback device.
Troubleshooting
• Check for a defective power card. Troubleshooting

WARNING 47, 24 V supply low

• Check the settings for warning/alarm/disabling in
parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function.
The 24 V DC is measured on the control card.
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
• Set the tolerable error in parameter 4-31 Motor
Feedback Speed Error.
A calibration error has occurred. Contact a Danfoss supplier
or the Danfoss service department. • Set the tolerable feedback loss time in
parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout.
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
The settings for motor voltage, motor current, and motor ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low
power are wrong. The actual motor current has not exceeded the release
brake current within the start delay time window.
Troubleshooting
• Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to 1-25. WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
The cutout temperature of the control card has exceeded
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
the upper limit.
The motor current is too low.

150 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Troubleshooting Programming Guide

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is • Check if the motor shaft is locked.
within the limits.
• Check if the start current triggers the current limit
• Check the fan operation. set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
• Check the control card. • Check if it increases the value in
parameter 30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s].
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
One or more options have either been added or removed ALARM 126, Motor Rotating
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration During AMA start-up, the motor is rotating. It is only valid
change is intentional and reset the unit. for PM motor.
ALARM 68, Safe stop activated Troubleshooting
Safe Torque Off (STO) is activated. If STO is in manual • Check if the motor is rotating before starting the
restart mode (default), to resume normal operation, apply AMA.
24 V DC to terminals 37 and 38 and initiate a reset signal WARNING 127, Back EMF too High
(via fieldbus, digital I/O, or [Reset]/[Off Reset] key). If STO is
in automatic restart mode, applying 24 V DC to terminals
This warning applies to PM motors only. When the back
EMF exceeds 90% x Uinvmax (overvoltage threshold) and
6 6
37 and 38 automatically resumes the frequency converter does not drop to a normal level within 5 s, this warning is
to normal operation. reported. The warning remains until the back EMF returns
ALARM 69, Power card temperature to a normal level.
The cutout temperature of the power card has exceeded
the upper limit.
Troubleshooting
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits.
• Check fan operation.
• Check the power card.
ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value
Parameter settings are initialized to default settings after a
manual reset.
Troubleshooting
• To clear the alarm, reset the unit.
WARNING 87, Auto DC-Braking
Occurs in IT mains when the frequency converter coasts,
and the DC voltage is higher than 830 V for 400 V units
and 425 V for 200 V units. The motor consumes energy on
the DC link. This function can be enabled/disabled in
parameter 0-07 Auto DC Braking.
ALARM 88, Option detection
A new option configuration has been detected. Set
parameter 14-89 Option Detection to [1] Enable Option
Change, and power cycle the frequency converter to
accept the new configuration.
ALARM 95, Broken belt
Torque is below the torque level set for no load, indicating
a broken belt. Parameter 22-60 Broken Belt Function is set
for alarm.
Troubleshooting
• Troubleshoot the system and reset the frequency
converter after clearing the fault.
ALARM 99, Locked Rotor
The rotor is blocked. It is only enabled for PM motor
control.

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 151

Index VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Index see also ETR

EMC......................................................................................................... 149
A ETR...................................................................................................... 5, 106
Abbreviations........................................................................................... 3 see also Electronic thermal relay

Adjustable warning............................................................................. 56 External process PID control, 7-5*.................................................. 76

Alarm log........................................................................................ 19, 103

F
AMA........................................................................................... 5, 148, 150
Fault
Analog signal....................................................................................... 147 log.......................................................................................................... 19
Approvals and certifications............................................................... 4 FC MC protocol...................................................................................... 78
Auto on..................................................................................................... 19 Feedback conversion, 7-6*................................................................ 76
Automatic motor adaptation................................................ 5, 23, 37 Fieldbus................................................................................................. 147
Freeze output........................................................................................... 4
B
Frequency converter identification............................................. 103
Brake
energy function, 2-1*...................................................................... 45 Frequency converter status............................................................ 106
power...................................................................................................... 5
resistor.................................................................................................... 5 G
resistor power limit....................................................................... 149
General settings.................................................................................... 77
Break-away torque.................................................................................. 4
General status...................................................................................... 105
Broken-belt detection...................................................................... 112
Broken-belt torque............................................................................ 112 H
Hand on.................................................................................................... 19
C
High altitude.......................................................................................... 12
Catch up................................................................................................... 58
High voltage........................................................................................... 11
Coast............................................................................................................ 4
Comparator............................................................................................. 91 I
Control
Identification, frequency converter............................................. 103
cable........................................................................................................ 8
terminal...................................................................................... 19, 146 Initialization
Current limit control..................................................................... 101 Manual procedure........................................................................... 21
Process control feedback.............................................................. 74 Procedure............................................................................................ 21
Process PID control.......................................................................... 74 Input signal........................................................................................... 150
Speed PID control............................................................................ 72
Torque PI control.............................................................................. 74 Inputs
Analog input.......................................................................... 4, 5, 147
Control card Digital input mode.......................................................................... 57
Control card..................................................................................... 147
Intermittent duty cycle......................................................................... 5
Current rating...................................................................................... 148
Inverter switching................................................................................ 96

D
J
Data readout........................................................................................ 105
Jog................................................................................................................ 4
DC brake current................................................................................... 45
DC brake cut-in speed........................................................................ 45
L
DC braking time.................................................................................... 45
LCP.................................................................................................. 4, 5, 143
Default setting............................................................................. 21, 121
LCP copy/save........................................................................................ 32
Digital Input............................................................................................ 57
Leakage current.................................................................................... 12
Discharge time...................................................................................... 11
LED.......................................................................................................... 143
Live zero................................................................................................... 69
E
Load compensation............................................................................. 33
Electrical wiring....................................................................................... 7
Load sharing.................................................................................... 11, 99
Electronic thermal relay........................................................................ 5

152 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Index Programming Guide

Local control........................................................................................... 19 Port setting............................................................................................. 78

Local reference...................................................................................... 24 Potentiometer reference.................................................................... 10
Logic rule................................................................................................. 92 Power cycle............................................................................................... 5
Preset reference.................................................................................... 48
M Programming......................................................................... 19, 20, 147
Main menu....................................................................................... 16, 19 Pulse input.............................................................................................. 66
Main reactance............................................................................... 37, 38 Pulse output, 5-6*................................................................................. 67
Mains Pulse reference......................................................................................... 5
on/off.................................................................................................... 97
supply..................................................................................................... 6
Voltage................................................................................................. 18 Q
Mechanical brake................................................................................. 47 Qualified personnel............................................................................. 11
Menu key................................................................................... 13, 18, 19 Quick menu.............................................................................. 14, 18, 19
Menu structure...................................................................................... 19
Minimum sleep time......................................................................... 111
R
Motor Rated motor current.............................................................................. 4
High back EMF................................................................................ 151 Rated motor speed................................................................................. 4
control principle............................................................................... 33
RCD............................................................................................................... 6
current.......................................................................... 18, 23, 37, 150
data............................................................................. 21, 23, 148, 150 Reference....................................................................................... 18, 106
limit....................................................................................................... 53 Relay configuration.............................................................................. 62
magnetization at 0 speed............................................................. 40
pole....................................................................................................... 39 Relay output........................................................................................... 60
power.......................................................................................... 18, 150 Reset......................................................................... 18, 19, 21, 148, 151
rotating............................................................................................. 151
Rotor resistance..................................................................................... 38
speed direction................................................................................. 53
status.................................................................................................. 105
voltage................................................................................................. 36 S
Overheating.................................................................................... 148
Warning............................................................................................. 148 Safety........................................................................................................ 12
Serial bus............................................................................................... 143
N Serial communication.................................................................... 4, 19
Navigation key......................................................................... 13, 18, 19 Set-up operation, 0-1*........................................................................ 25
Nominal motor speed......................................................................... 37 Short circuit.......................................................................................... 148
NPN............................................................................................................ 57 SLC............................................................................................................. 90
Numeric display.................................................................................... 13 Sleep mode.......................................................................................... 111
Sleep speed [Hz]................................................................................. 112
O Slip compensation.................................................................................. 6
Operating data.................................................................................... 103 Smart logic control............................................................................... 90
Operating mode................................................................................... 24 Start delay............................................................................................... 41
Operation key................................................................................. 13, 18 Start/stop................................................................................................... 9
Output current.................................................................................... 148 Start-up.................................................................................................... 21
Outputs Stator leakage reactance............................................................ 37, 38
Analog output..................................................................................... 5 Stator resistance.................................................................................... 38
Status menu........................................................................................... 16
P
Synchronous motor speed.................................................................. 4
Password.................................................................................................. 32
PELV........................................................................................................... 12 T
Phase loss.............................................................................................. 147 Terminal 42
PNP............................................................................................................ 57 Terminal 42 mode............................................................................ 71
Port diagnostics.................................................................................... 81 Terminal 45
Terminal 45 mode............................................................................ 71

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 153

Index VLT® AutomationDrive FC 360

Terminal 53
Terminal 53 filter time constant.................................................. 70
Terminal 53 high current............................................................... 70
Terminal 53 high voltage.............................................................. 69
Terminal 53 low current................................................................. 69
Terminal 53 low voltage................................................................ 69
Terminal 53 mode............................................................................ 70
Terminal 54
Terminal 54 filter time constant.................................................. 70
Terminal 54 high current............................................................... 70
Terminal 54 high voltage.............................................................. 70
Terminal 54 low current................................................................. 70
Terminal 54 low voltage................................................................ 70
Terminal 54 mode............................................................................ 70
Terminals
Control terminal............................................................................... 19
Input terminal................................................................................. 147
Thermal load................................................................................. 40, 106
Thermistor................................................................................................. 6
Timer......................................................................................................... 92
Torque
Limit.................................................................................................... 148
[%]....................................................................................................... 106
Trip................................................................................................................ 6
Trip condition...................................................................................... 143
Trip lock................................................................................................. 143

U
Unintended start........................................................................... 11, 99

V
Voltage imbalance............................................................................. 147
VVC+............................................................................................................ 6

W
Warning and alarm list..................................................................... 145
Warning current high.......................................................................... 56
Warning current low............................................................................ 56

154 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. MG06C802

Index Programming Guide

MG06C802 Danfoss A/S © 12/2018 All rights reserved. 155

Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

Danfoss A/S
Ulsnaes 1
DK-6300 Graasten
vlt-drives.danfoss.com

130R0507 MG06C802 12/2018

*MG06C802*